JP7442162B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

Conventional pachinko gaming machines perform a hit judgment to determine whether or not it is a hit on the condition that a game ball enters the starting hole, display a special symbol in a variable manner, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, 2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines that execute winning games (special game states) are known.

For example, the pachinko game machine described in Patent Document 1 below is provided with a performance control means that can control the performance. A weak SP reach, which suggests that the expectation level is low, and a strong SP reach, which suggests that the expectation level of winning is high, can be executed.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-058457

However, in recent years, there are many gaming machines that can execute low-expectation transition effects and high-expectation transition effects that suggest that the level of expectation to be controlled to a special gaming state is higher than the low-expectation transition effects, so it is simply a matter of low expectations. Merely being able to execute a transition performance and a highly anticipated transition performance may lack interest, and there is room for improvement in this respect.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
A game control means capable of determining whether or not to control to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
and a performance control means capable of executing a determination result performance that suggests the result of the determination,
The performance control means is
In the determination result performance, it is possible to shift to an expectation transition performance that suggests the degree of expectation to be controlled to the special gaming state,
In the judgment result performance, an expectation suggestion image that suggests a transition to the expectation transition performance can be displayed ,
In the determination result performance, a special image can be displayed that suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled to the special gaming state is higher than the expectation suggestion image without suggesting a transition to the expected transition performance;
The expected transition performance includes a low expectation transition performance and a high expectation transition performance that suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled to the special gaming state is higher than the low expectation transition performance,
The expectation-suggesting images include a low-expectation-suggesting image that suggests a transition to the low-expectation transition performance, and a high-expectation-suggesting image that suggests a transition to the high-expectation transition performance,
When the low expectation suggestion image is displayed at a predetermined branching point in the judgment result presentation, the transition is made to the low expectation transition presentation; on the other hand, when the high expectation suggestion image is displayed at the predetermined branching point, Moved to the highly anticipated transition production ,
The case where the special image is displayed in place of the low expectation suggestion image and the transition to the low expectation transition effect is better than the case where the low expectation suggestion image is displayed and the transition to the low expectation transition effect is performed. This gaming machine is characterized in that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the special gaming state is high .

According to the present invention, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a front view showing the second grand prize winning device etc. in detail. It is a front view of display devices. (A) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the under-board movable device are in standby state, and (B) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the under-board movable device are activated. It is a front view. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a sub-control board. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to general drawings, and (B) is a table showing random numbers related to special drawings. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a reach determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. This is a look-ahead determination table. This is a jackpot game control table. It is an explanatory diagram of a gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of production mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal variation of special figure variation performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach of the special figure variation effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SP reach of the special figure variation effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a hold effect. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a movable body effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of operation performance. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in a non-time saving state of the first embodiment. (A) A table showing the distribution rate of the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern selected in the case of a non-time-saving state and a jackpot in the first embodiment, (B) In the case of a non-time-saving state and a loss with reach in the first embodiment It is a table showing the distribution rate of the selected special figure 1 variation pattern, and (C) shows the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case of non-time saving state and no reach loss in the first embodiment. It's a table. It is a 1st look-ahead determination table of a non-time-saving state of 1st Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the display mode of the icon of a 1st embodiment, and the type of display mode of a pending icon. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the icon and the hold icon of the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing types of scenario patterns for displaying a hold icon according to the first embodiment. It is a scenario pattern selection table of the hold icon of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of scenario patterns for displaying the icon in the first embodiment. It is a scenario pattern selection table of the hold icon of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the on-board movable body of the first embodiment. It is an execution lottery table of the first icon change effect of the first embodiment. It is a production mode selection table of the first icon change production of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing execution timing of the first icon change performance of the first performance mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing execution timing of the 1st icon change production of the 2nd production mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a first icon change effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a first icon change effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a first icon change effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a first icon change effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a first icon change effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a first icon change effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a first icon change effect according to the first embodiment. It is an execution lottery table of the second icon change effect of the first embodiment. It is an execution lottery table of the third icon change effect of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the 2nd icon change performance, and the execution timing of the 3rd icon change performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a second icon change effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a third icon change effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a third icon change effect according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the production flow of special figure variation production of a 1st embodiment. It is a sub fluctuation pattern selection table for SPSP reach. (A) It is an execution lottery table of the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance of the first embodiment, and (B) It is the execution lottery table of the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance of the first embodiment. (A) An execution lottery table for the development suggestion performance of the first embodiment, and (B) an execution lottery table for the extremely hot suggestion performance of the first embodiment. This is a table showing the expected jackpot of SPSP Reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing execution timing of advance suggestion cut-in performance and execution timing of development suggestion performance. It is an explanatory view showing execution timing of advance suggestion cut-in performance and execution timing of super hot suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing execution timing of advance suggestion cut-in performance and execution timing of development suggestion performance. It is an explanatory view showing execution timing of advance suggestion cut-in performance and execution timing of super hot suggestion performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of branching effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of branching effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of branching effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of battle reach according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of cooperative reach according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of received command analysis processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart of the processing at the time of starting winning of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of the fluctuation|variation production start process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board according to the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a sub-control board according to a second embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is a front view showing a 7-segment display. It is a figure which shows the over-winning ball prevention function. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference number of balls. (A) It is a figure showing the production mode in the case of an over-prize ball abnormality, and (B) It is a figure showing the production mode in the case of the magnetic detection abnormality. (A) It is a figure showing a super prize ball preview image, and (B) It is a figure showing a game stop notice image. (A) is a diagram in which a purple border image is displayed in a high accuracy, high base state, and (B) is a diagram in which a red border image is displayed in a high accuracy, high base state. (A) is a diagram showing when the special reset switch is pressed, and (B) is a diagram showing when one hour has elapsed in the customer waiting state. 7 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of input processing. It is a flowchart of difference ball number measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of customer waiting measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of output processing. It is a flowchart of outer end signal output processing. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference number of balls in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the case where the difference number of balls is displayed on a 7 segment display in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. They are a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a small hit symbol type determination table, a losing symbol type determination table, and a reach determination table according to the third embodiment. It is a determination table of jackpot symbol types and small winning symbol types according to the third embodiment, and is a table explaining types of jackpots and small wins. It is a determination table of losing symbol types according to the third embodiment, and is a table explaining types of losing. It is a table showing types of a hit determination table, a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and an electric chew opening pattern table according to the third embodiment. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table according to a third embodiment. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing according to a third embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the game flow of the gaming machine concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure etc. which shows the display screen of each production mode based on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a specific example of a RUSH entry effect according to the third embodiment.

Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In this specification, in order to simplify the description, by writing symbols or codes that refer to information, signals, physical quantities, parts, etc., the names of the information, signals, physical quantities, parts, etc. for the symbols or codes may be omitted or May be abbreviated. Furthermore, in any flowchart described below, the execution order of a plurality of processes in any plurality of steps can be arbitrarily changed or executed in parallel within a range that does not cause inconsistency in the processing contents.

1. Structure of Gaming Machine Pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is a first embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 5. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Furthermore, "front" is the direction from the pachinko machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko machine PY1, and "back" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko machine PY1 toward the pachinko machine PY1. shall be.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine frame 2 includes an outer frame 22 and a front door 23 that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 22. Further, the front door 23 includes a game board mounting frame 2A to which a game board unit YU to be described later is attached, and a front frame 23m rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 2A via a hinge 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the game board 1 attached to the game board mounting frame 2A and the transparent plate 23t face each other. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. A transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like can be used as the transparent plate 23t. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) corresponds to the magnitude (firing strength) of the force applied to the game ball to make the game ball fire (the amount by which the firing device 72, which will be described later, drives the firing solenoid). It is being Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k. Further, a lower decorative body 36 that largely protrudes forward is provided at the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 23m. An upper tray 34 for storing game balls to be supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36. Further, a lower tray 35 is provided at the lower center of the front of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34.

An operable first input device (hereinafter referred to as "normal button") 40 is provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 in front of the upper plate 34 . The normal button 40 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a gripping part, or the like. Further, an operable second input device (hereinafter referred to as "special button") 41 is provided on the right decorative body 32 that is formed to protrude forward from the right edge of the front frame 23m. The special button 41 (operating means) includes, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a gripping part, and the like.

Further, a speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31 that is formed to protrude forward from the upper part of the surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 includes a left speaker 52L placed on the left side and a right speaker 52R placed on the right side. Further, frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower plate 35 in the front of the lower decorative body 36. Furthermore, a movable frame moving device 58 is attached above the left edge and right edge of the front frame 23m as a performance device for the purpose of increasing game interest. The frame moving device 58 includes a left frame moving device 58L arranged on the left side and a right frame moving device 58R arranged on the right side.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using mainly FIGS. 2 to 5. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a performance unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front. Along the opening 1A, a substantially ring-shaped inner wall 1B is formed to protrude forward and define a game area 6 through which game balls can flow. Further, on the outside of the inner wall portion 1B, a substantially ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C for partitioning the gaming area 6 is formed to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a game area 6 is formed which is surrounded by an inner wall part 1B, an outer wall part 1C, etc. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is partitioned into a game area 6 and other areas by the inner wall 1B and the outer wall 1C.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nail enters the game area 6 and moves the game ball flowing down the game area 6 through a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first winning opening 14, which will be described later. And, a route is configured to appropriately guide the player to the second grand prize opening 15 and the like.

In the gaming area 6, there is a first starting winning device 11D in which a first starting opening 11 into which a game ball can enter is formed, and a second starting winning device 11D that makes it possible or impossible for the ball to enter the second starting opening 12. A device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided.

The first starting winning device 11D is immovable. Therefore, the ease with which game balls enter the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). Winning the game ball into the first starting hole 11 is achieved by drawing the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 1") (obtaining and determining a random number related to Special Figure 1, which will be described later: hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 1 Lottery"). ) and the variable display of special map 1. Further, when the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 12D includes an operable electric tube opening/closing member 12k. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is normally (in a normal state) in a closed position in which it is impossible or extremely difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 12. When the special state is reached, the game ball moves to the open position where the game ball can enter the second starting port 12. In this way, the movement of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the "open state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D, and only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state, the game ball is moved to the second starting port 12. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the state in which the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D. Further, when the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D is in the "open state", it is also referred to as "the electric tube 12D is opened", and when the electric tube 12D is in the "closed state", it is also referred to as "the electric tube 12D is closed". ” is also called.

Winning a game ball into the second starting hole 12 is achieved by drawing a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 2") (obtaining and determining a random number related to Special Figure 2, which will be described later: hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 2 Lottery"). ) and the variable display of special map 2. Further, when the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a general winning hole 10 into which game balls can enter. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the game area 6 is provided with a gate 13 through which game balls can pass. The passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is the trigger for the lottery of a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol") (that is, the acquisition and determination of a regular symbol random number: hereinafter referred to as "common symbol lottery") and the variable display of a regular symbol. It has become. The electric chew 12D is opened by executing the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game is a game that involves opening the electric chew 12D.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a first big winning device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT14D") in which a first big winning opening 14 into which a game ball can enter is formed.

The first big prize winning device 14D includes a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can operate in an open state and a closed state. The first big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k. Normally, the AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state that closes the first big winning hole 14, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14. When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k operates in the open state, the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 14. In this way, the game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the first grand prize opening 14, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a guiding stage 12g that guides the gaming ball to the second starting port 12. In addition, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide stage 12g can flow down toward the second starting port 12.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a second grand prize winning device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") in which a second grand prize opening 15 into which game balls can enter is formed. The second big prize winning device 15D includes an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally closes the second grand prize opening 15, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 15. The VAT opening/closing member 15k can take an open state. When the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 15. On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k closes the second grand prize opening 15 is also referred to as a "closed state". In this way, the second big prize opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When the game balls enter the second grand prize opening 15, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the second grand prize winning device 15D will be explained in detail using FIG. 3. Inside the second big winning device 15D, there is provided a gate-shaped second big winning hole sensor 15a that can detect the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 and allow the game ball to pass downward. It is being

A specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 through which game balls can pass (enter) are provided in the downstream area of the second big prize opening sensor 15a. The game balls that have passed through the second big prize opening sensor 15a are sorted into a specific area 16 or a non-specific area 17 by a sorting device 16D. The sorting device 16D includes a sorting member 16k made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k. The distribution member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by driving the distribution solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in the first state (passage prevention state: the left end of the distribution member 16k when viewed from the front in FIG. 3(A) is located slightly to the right of the left end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific area 16 directly above it. When the distribution member 16k is in the first state, it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 to pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. It is difficult and passes through a non-specific area 17. The route of the game ball flowing down from this second big prize opening 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called a first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state (passage permission state: in a front view of FIG. 3(B)) in which the game ball is allowed to pass (enter) the specific area 16. The left end of the distribution member 16k is located slightly to the left of the right end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific area 16 directly above it, leaving the area directly above the specific area 16 open. When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from this second big prize opening 15 to the specific area 16 is called a second route.

Note that basically, the distribution member 16k is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 16k. Then, only in a predetermined round game (for example, 10R), the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and can change to the second state.

The specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 are provided with a specific area sensor 16a and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detect the game ball that has passed through (entered) each area 16 and 17 and allow the game ball to pass downward. .

Note that it is possible to provide only one of the first grand prize device 14D and the second grand prize device 15D within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Furthermore, the game board 1 is provided with a board lamp 54 that can emit light.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area (first game area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area is referred to as "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area is referred to as "right-handed hitting". In the pachinko game machine PY1, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with the left hand is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with the right hand. The possible flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails.

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, a first big winning port 14, and a second big winning port 15 are provided. Therefore, by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right, the player can pass through the gate 13, enter the second starting opening 12, the first big winning opening 14, or the second You can aim to win the big prize opening 15.

In addition, game balls that did not enter any of the winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, first big winning hole 14, and second big winning hole 15), It is guided to the out port 19 and discharged. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Further, a display device 8 is arranged below and to the left of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (a portion other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special figure 1 display 81a that variably displays special figure 1, a special figure 2 display 81b that variably displays special figure 2, and a special figure 2 display 81b that variably displays general figure 1. A general figure display 82 is included. In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 pending display 83a that displays the number of special figure 1 pending (U1: the number of variable displays of special figure 1 on the special figure 1 display 81a), which will be described later. Also included is a special figure 2 pending display 83b that displays the number of special figure 2 pending (U2: the number of reserved special figures 2 that is variablely displayed by the special figure 2 indicator 81b), which will be described later.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is held in response to the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 12. The winning of the game ball into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 corresponds to "the predetermined condition being satisfied" in the present invention. In addition, in the following explanation, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are collectively called the special drawing, and the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing are collectively called the special drawing drawing. Moreover, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the special figure display 81. Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display 83.

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed variably and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure, special figure derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of types of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stopping special symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (a special symbol with a specific stopping pattern, that is, a jackpot symbol), the grand prize opening (the first grand prize opening 14 and the second grand prize opening 15) is opened. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is played.

The special figure display 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), the special drawing display 81 will display "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, A jackpot symbol consisting of the lighting of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left is displayed, such as (: off). In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, the special drawing display 81 will display a losing pattern consisting of only the LED on the far right lighting up, such as "■■■■■■■□" do. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the manner of variable display of the special figure is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as when all LEDs flash at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific manner).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball hits the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, various random numbers (numerical information and judgment information) are generated for special drawing drawings, etc. example) may be obtained. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in a special figure reservation storage unit 105, which will be described later, as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the various random numbers obtained by winning (balls entering) the game ball into the first starting port 11 are referred to as "special drawing 1 related random numbers", and the various random numbers obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12 The various random numbers obtained by (ball entry) are referred to as "special map 2 related random numbers." Here, the special figure 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (number of special figure 1 reservations) and the number of special figure 2 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (number of special figure 2 reservations). It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, 4). In addition, hereinafter, the special map 1 reservation and the special map 2 reservation are collectively referred to as "special map reservation", and the number of special diagrams 1 and 2 reserved are collectively referred to as "the number of special diagrams reserved". In addition, the special figure 1 related random numbers and the special figure 2 related random numbers are collectively referred to as "special figure related random numbers."

In the pachinko game machine PY1, if the variable display of the special figure is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, specifically, while the variable display of the special figure is being executed. If a prize is won during the execution of a jackpot game (special game state), the variable display of the special drawing (or the right to draw the special drawing) for the winning can be reserved. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 is consumed when variable display of the special figure based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. That is, extinguishing the special figure reservation means determining the special figure related random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation and executing variable display of the special figure to show the determination result.

Then, the special figure reservation number is displayed on the special figure reservation display 83. Each of the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special symbols reserved. Is possible.

In addition, the variable display of the general map notifies the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed variably and then stopped. The general map that is stopped and displayed (the stationary general map, the general map derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one general map selected from among a plurality of types of general maps by lottery. If the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure (ordinary figure with a predetermined stop mode, that is, a winning symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D) is opened. .

The common map display device 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the common map according to the result of the general map lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. When the result of the common symbol lottery is a win, the common symbol display 82 displays a winning symbol consisting of both LEDs lighting up, such as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). If the result of the lottery is a loss, a loss pattern such as "■□" consisting of only the right LED being lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is variablely displayed for a predetermined variable time. The mode of variable display of the ordinary map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of variable display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all LEDs blinking at once, unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, a regular symbol random number (an example of numerical information or determination information) for performing a regular symbol lottery may be acquired. This random number is stored in the below-mentioned normal pattern holding storage section 106 on the condition that the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not executed. It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, 4 pieces) to the number of general drawings that can be stored in the general drawing holding storage unit 106 (number of general drawings pending). In addition, below, the normal pattern random number acquired by the game ball passing through the gate 13 is also referred to as the "normal pattern related random number."

Next, the performance unit 1U attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained using FIG. The production unit 1U is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform production. The performance unit 1U is equipped with an image display device 50, a first board movable device (hereinafter referred to as "on board movable device") 55, and a second board movable device (hereinafter referred to as "bottom board movable device") 56.

The image display device 50 is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, a dot display, a 7-segment display, etc., and includes a display section 50a (display section) capable of displaying patterns and the like.

The on-board movable device 55 is disposed in front of the display section 50a, is movable along the display section 50a, and includes a decorated on-board movable body 55k (movable body). The under-board movable device 56 is disposed in front of the display section 50a, is movable along the display section 50a, and includes a decorated under-board movable body 56k.

FIG. 5A schematically shows how the above-panel movable body 55k and the under-panel movable body 56k are held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which they are not in operation. When the drive source of the above-board movable device 55 is driven, the above-board movable body 55k moves downward (down), and when the drive source of the under-board movable device 56 is driven, the under-board movable body 56k moves upward (raised). do. At this time, the image display device 50 is covered by the lowered on-board movable body 55k or the raised under-board movable body 56k, and the image display device 50 becomes difficult to see.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained based on FIGS. 6 and 7. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has various functions such as a special drawing lottery, a variable display of special drawings, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a general drawing drawing, a variable display of a general drawing, and auxiliary games. A game control board (hereinafter referred to as "main control board") 100 that performs control regarding gaming profits (progress of the game), game performances according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 (special figure fluctuation performance (judgment result suggestion performance), reservation Performance control board (hereinafter referred to as "sub" A control board 120, a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. are further provided on the back side of the game board 1 than the image display device 50. The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. Further, the sub-control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control section that controls effects, together with an image control board 140, a lamp control circuit 151, and an audio control circuit 161, which will be described later. The production control unit includes at least a sub-control board 120, and uses production means (image display device 50, speaker 52 (output means), frame lamp 53, panel lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, etc.). It is sufficient if it is possible to control game effects, customer waiting effects, and operation promotion effects.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a power supply board 190. The power supply board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, sub-control board 120, and payout control board 170, and also supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. A backup power supply circuit 192 is provided on the power supply board 190. The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to a gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and a production RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the information stored in the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 is retained even when the power is cut off to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, a power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON or OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches the power on or off. Note that the main control board 100 may be provided with a backup power circuit for the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100, or the sub-control board 120 may be provided with a backup power circuit for the performance RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 is equipped with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The gaming control microcomputer 101 includes a gaming ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the gaming, a gaming RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a gaming ROM 103 is included.

The gaming ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, which will be described later. , auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached. Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with the above-mentioned special symbol reservation storage section 105, regular symbol reservation storage section 106, and the like.

The main control board 100 also includes a gaming I/O (Input/Output) port section 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and a gaming CPU 102 for clearing information stored in the gaming RAM 104. A RAM clear switch 119 is mounted for this purpose.

Various sensors MS and various actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting port sensor that detects game balls that have entered the first starting port 11, and a second sensor that detects game balls that have entered the second starting port 12. A starting hole sensor, a general winning hole sensor that detects the game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10, a gate sensor that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13, and a first sensor that detects the game ball that has entered the first large winning hole 14. A big winning hole sensor, a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15, a specific area sensor 16a that detects the game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16), Also included is a non-specific area sensor 17a that detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17). When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal according to the detected content to the main control board 100. Note that the type and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid that drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D, and a solenoid that drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first big winning device 14D. It includes a first big winning opening solenoid, a second big winning opening solenoid that drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k of the sorting device 16D. . Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the main control board 100 is connected to displays 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for monitoring payout. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. The firing device 72 is also connected via the firing control circuit 175. Note that the firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 pays out prize balls using the prize ball payout device 73 and the rental ball payout device 74 based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. and pay out rental balls. The number of game balls to be paid out is output to the payout control board 170.

Further, the firing device 72 is provided with a touch switch capable of detecting contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k (see FIG. 1). When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170. Further, a firing volume knob is connected to the firing device 72 and is capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing solenoid so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob. In the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the main control board 100 transmits various commands containing information regarding the game to the sub control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The sub control board 120 can grasp the progress status of the game (game control content) by the main control board 100 based on various commands sent from the main control board 100. Note that the connection between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 120 as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 121 (performance control means) includes a performance ROM 123 that stores programs etc. for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the main control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and A performance CPU 122 that executes a program stored in a performance ROM 123 is included.

Furthermore, the production ROM 123 stores programs for performing sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, sub-side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 120 is equipped with an I/O port section 138 for performance and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139 for inputting and outputting data and signals. The RTC 139 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 139 operates on the power when the pachinko game machine PY1 is supplied with power from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown), and when the power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the power supply board 190 operates. It operates using power supplied from a backup power supply circuit 192 provided therein. Therefore, the RTC 139 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not turned on. Note that a backup power supply circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided on the sub-control board 120. A circuit including a capacitor and a built-in battery (such as a button battery) can be used as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 140 is connected to the sub-control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 of the sub-control board 120 controls the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to control the image display device based on commands received from the main control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100. 50 display control is performed. Note that the connection between the sub-control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the sub-control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the sub-control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 used for expanding the image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. It is equipped with Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured on one chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50 image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100. Output.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be used as a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various switches serving as input sections, various actuators SA serving as drive sources, and various lamps SL are connected to the sub-control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the sub-control board 120. Further, the sub-control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators SA. Furthermore, the sub-control board 120 controls the lighting of various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100.

The various switches connected to the sub-control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a and a special button detection switch 41a. The normal button detection switch 40a detects that the normal button 40 is pressed. The special button detection switch 41a detects that the special button 41 has been pressed. Each detection switch 40a, 41a outputs a signal according to the detected content to the sub-control board 120. Note that the type and number of switches connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators SA connected to the sub-control board 120 include motors that drive the above-panel movable device 55, the under-panel movable device 56, the frame movable device 58, etc., and drive the motors to control each movable device. It is possible to perform a predetermined operation. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151. Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various lamps SL connected to the sub-control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a board lamp 54, etc., and each lamp is caused to emit light. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that a CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 151 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of each lamp and control the operation of each movable device. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM. Further, the type and number of lamps connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

3. Main games played by the gaming machine Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a regular lottery when the fired game balls pass through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also referred to as the ``losing pattern'' to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 when the variable display of the standard pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the standard pattern variation starting condition."

Pachinko game machine PY1 acquires a random number related to a common pattern when a basic pattern fluctuation starting condition is satisfied when performing such a series of games (general pattern lottery, variable display of normal pattern, auxiliary game). As shown in FIG. 8(A), the obtained ordinary symbol-related random numbers include ordinary symbol random numbers. The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using one or more hit determination tables as shown in FIG. 9(A). The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. In other words, the gaming state includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state, and the hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and the hit determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving It is possible to distinguish between the hit determination table) and the hit determination table. In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number values) are assigned to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. Then, based on the result of the hit determination, a normal pattern variation pattern is determined for variable display of the normal pattern. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, basically the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, basically the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Furthermore, the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary figure fluctuation The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern using one or more ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination tables as shown in FIG. 9(B). The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table includes a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the short-time regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) and the short-time regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol (losing common symbol) is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined such that the common symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is Regarding the variable display of ordinary figures in the case where the ordinary figures are stopped and displayed, a general figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined such that the common symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display of figures, a general figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds. A variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. Further, these ordinary figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery).

The auxiliary game includes elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components), that is, various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Each of these elements is associated with a gaming state. Pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game based on the game state using one or more auxiliary game control tables as shown in FIG. 9(C). The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state. Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. Further, the number of openings and opening time for each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time (a time during which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the electric chew 12D (for example, 0.08 seconds)). Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". In addition, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a second opening time that is longer than the first opening time (a time during which it is easy to make the game ball enter the electric chew 12D (for example, 3.00 seconds)). Open. Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game".

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting slot 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbol 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. On the other hand, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. On the other hand, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, below, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

Pachinko game machine PY1 acquires a special pattern-related random number when a starting condition is established in order to play a series of games (special pattern drawing, variable display of special pattern, jackpot game, and setting of gaming state). Perform various judgments regarding random numbers. As shown in FIG. 8(B), the special pattern related random numbers to be acquired include special pattern random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot pattern type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special pattern fluctuation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number for determining reach. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Note that the random number is sometimes referred to as determination information.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot Judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game) using one or more jackpot judgment tables as shown in FIG. 10(A). The gaming states include a normal probability state and a high probability state, and the jackpot determination table is associated with whether the game is in the normal probability state or the high probability state. That is, as a jackpot judgment table, it is possible to distinguish between a jackpot judgment table used in a normal probability state (normal probability jackpot judgment table) and a jackpot judgment table used in a high probability state (high probability jackpot judgment table). It is possible.

In each jackpot determination table, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table. Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination is performed when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, using one or more jackpot symbol type determination tables as shown in FIG. 10(B). ). For each type of jackpot symbol, it is possible to associate the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot consisting of game benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table is associated with the type of the special symbol that is variably displayed, in other words, the type of the starting opening where the prize was won due to the jackpot symbol type determination (which caused the jackpot symbol type determination to occur). is possible. That is, as the jackpot symbol type determination table, there is a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing the variable display of special figure 2. It is possible to distinguish between the symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot symbols, and in each jackpot symbol type determination table, the judgment value of the jackpot symbol type random number (jackpot symbol type random number value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. There is. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. Further, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10(B), the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol type based on the jackpot symbol type determination for special symbol 1 is set to 50% for jackpot symbol X and 50% for jackpot symbol Y, and for special symbol 2. It is possible for the jackpot symbol Z to make the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type 100% based on the jackpot symbol type determination. In this way, the jackpot symbol type is determined in the special drawing 1 lottery, which is held when a game ball enters the first starting opening 11, and the special drawing 2 drawing, which is held when a gaming ball enters the second starting opening 12. It is possible to have different fractions.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment Reach judgment determines whether or not to generate a reach with the special symbol variation effect described later, using one or more reach judgment tables as shown in FIG. 10(C) when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss. This is a judgment to determine whether

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the reach determination table is distinguished between a reach determination table used in a non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in a time saving state (time saving reach determination table). Is possible.

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random value) is assigned to the reach determination results, ``with reach (reach occurs)'' and ``no reach (reach does not occur)''. . Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is a reach or no reach (whether or not to generate a reach). As shown in FIG. 10(C), it is possible to vary the number of reach random values that are determined to be "reach exists" (reach occurs) in the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is. In addition, in the following, "with reach (generates reach)", which is performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", is referred to as "loss with reach", and "without reach (does not cause reach)" is referred to as "loss with reach". )” is sometimes referred to as “no-reach loss.”

3-2-4. Special pattern fluctuation To determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern, use one or more special pattern fluctuation pattern determination tables (special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) as shown in Figures 11 and 12 to determine the fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern (Special figure fluctuation pattern) This is a judgment to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern, and is carried out in both cases where the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot or a loss. The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can include identification information regarding the result of jackpot determination and the result of reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (performance content) of the special symbol variation performance. As the special figure variation pattern, it is possible to use a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns each having different identification information, and the number thereof can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with the type of special symbol that is variablely displayed as the target of determination, in other words, the type of starting opening where a winning is made due to the special figure variation pattern determination. That is, as a special figure variation pattern judgment table, there is a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 11) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) that is sometimes used.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table). Note that the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table does not need to be divided for each gaming state.

Further, each special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state can be further associated with a jackpot determination result, a jackpot symbol type determination result, or a reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each include one for jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each include one for jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for no reach loss can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. In addition, each special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for no-reach loss can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures. For example, the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no reach loss is used when the special pattern 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2, and the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table is used when the special pattern 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4. It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss.

Then, the special figure display device 81 performs a variable display of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Ru.

Further, each special figure variation pattern can be associated with a production flow of a special figure variation production as shown in the second column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 and 12.

In addition, as shown in the rightmost column of the tables in Figures 11 and 12, names can be attached to the special figure fluctuation patterns in association with the special figure (jackpot determination result) and the production content of the special figure fluctuation effect. be. For example, a special pattern fluctuation pattern related to a jackpot is called a "jackpot fluctuation." On the other hand, a special pattern fluctuation pattern in which SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed in a loss with reach is called "SP loss fluctuation", and a special pattern in which L reach, which is a type of reach, is performed in loss with reach. The figure variation pattern is "L loss variation", and the special figure variation pattern in which the special figure variation effect ends with N reach (normal reach effect), which is a type of reach, is "N loss variation". The special pattern fluctuation pattern related to no-reach losses is called "normal loss fluctuation." Note that N reach corresponds to the "specific reach effect" of the present invention.

3-2-5. Pre-reading determination Pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs pre-reading determination using one or more pre-reading determination tables as shown in FIG. 13, based on the acquired special figure related random numbers. The look-ahead determination includes, for example, determining whether the special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination, determining which jackpot symbol type the jackpot symbol type random number is determined to be in the jackpot symbol type determination, and determining whether the special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot symbol type determination. There is a determination as to which special figure variation pattern the figure variation pattern random number is determined to be in the special figure variation pattern determination. The pre-reading determination table can be associated with the type of starting opening related to the starting prize. That is, as the pre-reading determination table, there is a pre-reading determination table (first pre-reading determination table) when a prize is won in the first starting opening 11, and a pre-reading determining table (second pre-reading determination table) when winning in the second starting opening 12. , it is possible to distinguish between

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. In other words, the look-ahead determination table is distinguished between a look-ahead decision table used in a non-time-saving state (non-time-saving look-ahead decision table) and a look-ahead decision table used in a time-saving state (time-saving look-ahead decision table). Is possible.

In other words, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead decision table used in a non-time-saving state, a first look-ahead decision table used in a time-saving state, and a second look-ahead decision table used in a non-time save state. It is possible to distinguish between the second prefetch determination table used in the time saving state and the second prefetch determination table used in the time saving state. Note that what kind of determination is included in the prefetch determination can be changed as appropriate.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, the jackpot game will be explained. A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot (first jackpot 14 or second jackpot 15), and a round game from the start of the jackpot until the start of the first round. It includes an opening (also written as OP) and an ending (also written as ED) from the end of the final round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending. Furthermore, it is possible to not provide OP and ED. Note that hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is called "1 round (1R)," and the 10th round game is called "10 rounds (10R)."

The elements constituting such a jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements) include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 14 or second big winning hole 15) in each round game, Includes the type and opening time of each opening (opening pattern), the time to be closed until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). ing. After the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using one or more jackpot game control tables as shown in FIG. The jackpot game control table stores jackpot game components for each jackpot game. As the jackpot game, it is possible to control one or more types of jackpot games.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14, from 1R to 10R, the first big winning hole 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or the first big winning hole 14 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. An open round game will be played. In 10R (final round), a round game in which the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds is played. It will be done. In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are detected by the big winning hole sensor, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning holes 14 and 15 has elapsed, End the round game.

Further, the number of times and time for each element can be changed as appropriate. Further, the jackpot game can be played using both the first big winning hole 14 and the second big winning hole 15, or only one of them.

Here, the specific area 16 will be explained in detail. The specific area 16 has a closed state in which prizes cannot be won and an open state in which prizes can be won by the distribution member 16k, so the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be said to be the opening and closing mode of the specific area 16. In the following, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k will also be referred to as the "opening/closing mode of the specific area 16." In this way, the distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operating manner (the specific area 16 is opened/closed in a constant manner), but the distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operational manner (the specific area 16 is opened/closed in a constant manner). In combination with the opening/closing mode of the second big prize opening 15 in the jackpot game, the difficulty (ease) of letting the game ball enter the specific area 16 in the jackpot game is set. Note that, hereinafter, the state in which the specific region 16 is in an open state is also referred to as "V open".

For 15 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening starts, the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (FIG. 3(B)). Therefore, in a round game in which the second big prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second big prize opening 15, the time and the period during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. From the relationship with the timing, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to cause the game ball to enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in a round game in which the second big winning hole 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second big winning hole 15, and the time and timing during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. Due to the relationship with timing, it is almost impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to cause the game ball to enter the specific area 16). In this way, during the jackpot game, the VAT opening/closing member is used in the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that allows the game ball to easily pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage"). The VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a jackpot game in which the game ball 15k and the distribution member 16k operate, and in a second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. It is possible to execute a jackpot game. A jackpot game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the V-long opening pattern as described above is called a "V-long jackpot." On the other hand, a jackpot game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a V-short opening pattern is referred to as a "V-short jackpot."

3-4. Game State Next, the game state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 15, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state", "high probability high base gaming state", and " It is possible to set the game state to any one of the "jackpot game state". In addition, "low probability low base gaming state" is referred to as "low probability low base state", "low probability high base gaming state" is referred to as "low probability high base state", and "high probability low base gaming state" is referred to as "high probability". The "low base state" and the "high probability high base gaming state" can be respectively abbreviated as the "high probability high base state." The gaming states include a state related to the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" in the jackpot determination, and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chew 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. On the other hand, the latter includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state.

The normal probability state is set in the "low probability low base gaming state" or the "low probability high base gaming state", and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is the normal probability. The high probability state is set in the "high probability low base gaming state" or the "high probability high base gaming state", and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high probability state is more advantageous to the player than the normal probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a normal probability state is set. Then, by winning the jackpot, it becomes possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, in a jackpot game, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, it is possible to switch to a high probability state. It is also possible to switch to a high probability state depending on the type of jackpot symbol. The high probability state can be switched from the high probability state to the normal probability state by performing jackpot determination a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot or by winning the next jackpot.

The non-time saving state is set in a "low probability low base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" or "jackpot gaming state". The time saving state is set in the "low probability high base gaming state" or the "high probability high base gaming state", and is a gaming state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state. It is. For example, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is longer (for example, 3.00 seconds) than the opening time (for example, 0.08 seconds) of the electric chew 12D in the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time-saving state, the special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment is performed using a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table that is set so that the special pattern fluctuation pattern with a short special pattern fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time-saving state. It is also possible to do so (see FIGS. 11 and 12). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to easily make the normal pattern fluctuation time shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, a regular pattern fluctuation time (5 seconds) is determined which is shorter than the regular pattern fluctuation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the short time state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater.

Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier to determine a hit in the hit determination compared to the non-time-saving state. For example, in a time-saving state, a win is determined with a higher probability (for example, 59936/65536) than in a non-time-saving state (for example, 6600/65536). Therefore, in the time saving state, the number of times that a hit is determined to be a hit per unit time is greater.

In this way, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in a time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in possession. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a non-time saving state is set. For example, by winning a jackpot, a time saving state can be set. The time-saving state can be changed from a time-saving state to a non-time-saving state by performing jackpot determination a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

In addition, in the time saving state, compared to the non-time saving state, it is easier to win a prize, the normal pattern fluctuation time is more likely to be shortened, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is more likely to be longer. Three points are set to be advantageous to the player regarding the game related to the common map. However, only some of these points may be set advantageously for this player.

The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 after it is powered on for the first time is a "low probability low base gaming state" in which a normal probability state and a non-time saving state are set. This gaming state is also referred to as a "normal gaming state." In addition, in the "jackpot game state", a hit determination is performed but a jackpot determination is not performed, so a non-time saving state is set with the start of the jackpot game. Furthermore, regarding the gaming states, it is possible to use all or only some of the gaming states described above.

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 16 to 22.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, special symbol fluctuation production is performed in "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variation production and indicates that it is in a standby state where no special symbol variation production is being performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 16 (A-1), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, a setting screen G101 for making settings regarding the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16 (A-2). is displayed. Settings related to effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display section 50a ("light amount settings"), and frequency settings for effects to be performed ("effect settings").

The normal production mode can be set when a special symbol variation production is being performed in the "low probability low base gaming state" or the "high probability low base gaming state", and is a production mode that indicates a non-time saving state. be. For example, as shown in FIG. 16 (B-1), the normal presentation mode includes a first normal presentation mode in which a background image representing a daytime mountain scene (normal daytime background image G102) is displayed on the display unit 50a. 16(B-2), a second normal effect mode in which a background image representing an evening mountain scene (evening normal background image G103) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and FIG. 16(B-2). As shown in -3), there is a third normal performance mode in which a background image representing a mountain scenery at night (normal nighttime background image G104) is displayed on the display section 50a, and the player can play 1 without winning the jackpot. It can be switched on the condition that the special figure variation effect is performed once or multiple times. Furthermore, each of the first to third normal performance modes includes a normal first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol variation performance, and a normal second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the normal first stage production mode, any one of the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, and the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display section 50a, but in the normal second stage production mode, depending on the type of reach A dedicated background image will be displayed. Further, a special effect mode may be provided that is set only in the "high probability low base game state".

The probability variable production mode is a production mode that can be set when a special symbol variation production is performed in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode that indicates a high probability state and a time saving state. In the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 16 (B-4), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, the probability variable performance mode includes a probability variable first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol fluctuation performance, and a probability variable second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the probability variable first stage production mode, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, but in the probability variation second stage production mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when the special symbol variation performance is being performed in the "low probability high base game state", and is a performance mode that indicates the normal probability state and the time-saving state. In the time-saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 16 (B-5), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G106) is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, the time-saving performance mode includes a time-saving first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol variation performance, and a time-saving second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the time-saving first performance mode, the time-saving background image G106 is displayed on the display section 50a, but in the time-saving second stage performance mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach is displayed.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A jackpot opening performance in which the winning image G108 is displayed is performed. During a round in a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 16 (C-2), a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and a prize ball number image G110 indicating the number of prize balls paid out are displayed on the display unit 50a. A round performance will be held. During the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 16 (C-3), on the display section 50a, an ending image G111 indicating the performance mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls that have been paid out are displayed. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball count image G112 is displayed.

Note that the types of production modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special Figure Variation Effect Next, the special figure variation effect (also simply referred to as "variation effect") will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, and A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result). In the special symbol variation performance, a variation display of performance symbols is performed on the display unit 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. The production design is composed of, for example, number symbols from 1 to 9, and in the variable display of the production design, the production design changes with the start of the variable display of the special pattern, and the production pattern changes with the end of the variable display of the special pattern. stops. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, the result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of the performance symbols.

In addition, in the special figure variation production, in addition to the variable display of production symbols, there are various displays such as the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the panel lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the normal button 40, the special button 41, etc. It is possible to perform other performances using similar performance equipment. In this case, even after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to continue performing other performances.

4-2-1. Effect pattern display area As shown in FIG. 17(A), the display part 50a of the image display device 50 has left effects on the left, center, and right sides of the display area 50a, which is divided approximately equally into three parts in the horizontal direction. It is possible to provide a symbol area 50b1, a middle performance symbol area 50b2, and a right performance symbol area 50b3. The left performance symbol area 50b1 is an area where the left performance symbol EZ1 is displayed when the performance symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation performance. Similarly, the middle performance symbol area 50b2 and the right performance symbol region 50b3 are areas for displaying the middle performance symbol EZ2 and the right performance symbol EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17(A), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in one section of the left end (upper left corner) of the upper end of the display section 50a. The small symbol area 50c is an area where the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed when the special symbol is variably displayed. The small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are composed of numerical symbols 1 to 9, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 17(A), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by two-dot chain lines, but this is the left presentation pattern area 50b1. , the middle effect pattern area 50b2, the right effect pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are described to represent the range, and are not actually displayed.

4-2-2. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started.

When the variable display of the special symbols starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(A), the left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display section 50a, and From the state where the small left pattern KZ1, the small medium pattern KZ2, and the small right pattern KZ3 are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the variable display of the special pattern is waiting, as shown in FIG. 17(B) As shown in FIG. 2, with the start of the process, variable display of performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started, and variable display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is also started. Note that "↓" in FIG. 17 indicates that the symbol is being displayed in a changing manner. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of this special symbol is, for example, "normal loss variation", the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are different, as shown in FIG. 17 (C-1). After temporarily stopping in a stop mode, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called flop) that suggests a loss, as shown in FIG. 17(D). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. There are multiple types of stopping patterns that indicate a loss, such as "1, 1, 2" and "2, 4, 6", in which the left and right symbols are not the same. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a special symbol variation pattern with a reach, such as "N loss variation", as shown in FIG. 17 (C-2), the left production symbol EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 temporarily stop in the same stopping manner (so-called reach eye), and reach is established. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continued, and a reach effect is performed according to the special symbol variation pattern. Note that the stopping order and stopping manner of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established in the normal variation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the result of the jackpot determination may be a "jackpot", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In N reach, as shown in FIG. 18(A), the state in which reach is established is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and as shown in FIG. 18(B), the fluctuation speed of the medium effect symbol EZ2 gradually changes. It slows down. If the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "N loss variation", as shown in FIG. Symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a miss in the reach. There are a plurality of types of stopping patterns that suggest a miss in the reach, such as "7, 6, 7" and "5, 3, 5", in which the left and right symbols are the same and the inner symbol is different from the left and right symbols. On the other hand, if the special pattern fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is, for example, "N jackpot fluctuation", the game will stop in a stopping manner (so-called double) that suggests a jackpot, as shown in Figure 18 (C-2). indicate. There are multiple types of stopping patterns that suggest a jackpot, such as "7.7.7" and "2.2.2", in which the symbols in the left and right middles are the same. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. In addition, the performance content of N reach is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the medium performance symbol EZ2, but can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2-4. SP Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In SP reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G1 representing that reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 19(B), an SP reach-only performance (for example, a battle performance) is performed. Then, when the final phase of the SP reach-only performance is reached, if the special pattern fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "SP jackpot fluctuation", the display section At 50a, a production that suggests a jackpot (for example, a display in which the main character is happy after winning the battle) is performed, and the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 stop in a stop mode that suggests a jackpot (so-called double eye). indicate. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. On the other hand, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is, for example, "SP loss variation", as shown in Figure 19 (C-2), there will be an effect that suggests a loss (for example, an enemy character enters the battle). At the same time, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode that suggests a loss of reach. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. Note that the contents of the SP reach performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

Here, the possibility that the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for each reach will be stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) will be explained in detail. The jackpot expectation level for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the jackpot determination result. For example, if the execution probability of N Reach is 10% when the jackpot determination result is "Lose" and 100% when the jackpot determination result is "Jackpot", the execution probability of SP Reach is If the result of the jackpot judgment is "Lose", it is set to 4%, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is "Jackpot", it is set to 100%, then the jackpot expectation of SP reach is higher than the jackpot expectation of N reach. It is possible to set it higher. In addition, SP Reach A and SP Reach B are made executable as SP Reach, and the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and if the result of the Jackpot determination is "Lose", the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2%. If the probability of executing SP Reach B is set to 20% in the case of , the execution probability of SP Reach B will be set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and 30% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose". For example, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation level of SP Reach B higher than the jackpot expectation level of SP Reach A. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation level.

4-3. Pending Icon Display Area The display unit 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a pending icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 20(A). The reservation icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3, and a fourth display area 50d4. A hold icon HA (hold display) can be displayed in the display areas 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, and 50d4. For example, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "1", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "2", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and A hold icon HA is displayed in the second display area 50d2.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(A), an icon display area 50e (predetermined display position) consisting of one display area can be provided near the pending icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display the icon TA, which is the same as or different from the pending icon HA, in response to the start of the special figure variation effect. Note that the pending icon HA and the icon TA correspond to the "predetermined icon" of the present invention.

Note that the number of display areas constituting the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the reservation icon display area 50d can be used as a display area that displays both the number of special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2, or can be used as a display area that displays only one of them.

4-3-1. Hold Performance Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform hold performance in response to a game ball entering the first starting slot 11 or the second starting slot 12. The reservation performance can notify the player of the number of special symbols 1 or 2 reserved.

In the hold effect, when the game ball enters the first starting slot 11 when the special figure 1 hold count is "0", the special figure fluctuation effect is started, and for example, as shown in FIG. 20(B), the icon The icon TA is displayed in the display area 50e. Then, when two more game balls enter the first starting slot 11 during the special figure variation performance, as shown in FIG. 20(C), the first display area 50d1 and the second display area of the reserved icon display area 50d A hold icon HA is displayed at 50d2, and the player is informed that the special figure 1 hold count is "2". After that, when the special figure variation effect is finished and a new special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 20(D), the hold icon displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d HA moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the hold icon HA that was displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed. Then, the player is informed that the special figure 1 pending number is "1".

4-4. Preview Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a preview performance at any timing during the special figure variation performance. The preview performance is a performance using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the input devices 40, 41, etc., and includes the results of jackpot determination and the special pattern fluctuation pattern. It is possible to suggest the result of the judgment.

4-4-1. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of performing a movable body performance using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 as a preview performance. The movable body performance is a performance that operates the movable devices 55, 56, and 58, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win.

In the movable object performance, for example, when N reach progresses to SP reach, as shown in FIG. It is suggested that the lower movable body 56k moves so as to overlap with the display section 50a as seen from the player, leading to SP reach. At this time, the effect image is displayed in a space of the display section 50a that does not overlap with the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k return to the normal standby state (initial position) and develop into SP reach. Note that the movable body performance is not limited to suggesting the development of SP reach, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-2. Operation performance The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform an operation performance using the normal button 40 and special button 41 as a preview performance. The operation performance is a performance in which the player operates the normal button 40 or the special button 41, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win.

In the operation performance, for example, in SP reach, a period (button operation validity period) occurs during which the press operation of the special button 41 is valid, and with the occurrence of this button operation validity period, as shown in FIG. 22 (A) , a performance that prompts the user to operate the special button 41 (button operation promotion performance) is performed. In the button operation promotion effect, a button operation promotion image G3 is displayed on the display section 50a. The button operation promotion image G3 includes an image imitating the special button 41 (button image G31), an image (button press operation image G32) representing the operation mode (i.e., press operation) of the special button 41, and a button operation valid period. An image representing the remaining time (operation valid period remaining time image G33) is included. Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G33 is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Thereafter, in response to the special button 41 being pressed during the button operation valid period, or after the button operation valid period has elapsed without any special button 41 being operated during the button operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 22(B). As shown in , the on-board movable device 55 is activated, and as seen from the player, the on-board movable body 55k moves so as to overlap the display section 50a, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot. Note that the operation performance is not limited to the operation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-3. Pre-read performance The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing a pre-read performance for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold for which the special figure lottery has not been performed, as a preview effect. The pre-reading performance functions as a performance for suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special symbol lottery for the special symbol 1 reservation or the special symbol 2 reservation.

In the look-ahead performance, for example, if the result of the look-ahead determination for the special drawing 1 hold is a "jackpot", the hold icon HA, which is normally displayed as ``O'', in the hold icon display area 50d, as shown in FIG. 20(C). may be displayed as "☆". Further, when the result of the pre-reading determination is "lost", the hold icon HA may be displayed as "☆" as a so-called fake effect. In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the change is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, and changes or additions can be made as appropriate. For example, it is also possible to change the stopping manner of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special symbol variation performance.

5. Control of the game by the game control microcomputer 101 Next, the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 (game control means) will be explained based on FIGS. 23 and 24. Note that counters, timers, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101, which will be explained below, are provided in the game RAM 104.

[1. Main control main processing]
When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the main control board 100 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 23 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the main control main processing, first, power-on processing (S001) is performed. In the power-on process, permission settings for access to the gaming RAM 104, settings for the gaming CPU 102, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Following the power-on processing, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of the various random numbers shown in FIGS. 8(A) and 8(B) are updated by adding 1. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a portion of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the main side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the main side timer interrupt process (S005) ends and until the next main side timer interrupt process (S005) starts, various changes are made by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003). The process of updating the random number counter value is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while the interrupt is disabled, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

[2. Main side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 24, in the main side timer interrupt processing (S005), output processing (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 120, payout control board 170, etc.

In the input process (S102) that is performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects when the lower tray 35 is full, and inputs the detection signal to the game as the lower tray full data. The data is stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 8(A) and 8(B) is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt process (S005) and during the other period (main side timer interrupt process (S005)). After the completion of S005), the interrupt processing is performed both during the period until the next main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started.

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Following the special operation process (S106), a sorting device control process for controlling the sorting device 16D is performed (S107).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S108) and ends the main side timer interrupt processing (S005). Other processing (S108) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S108), a payout control process for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170 in response to winning of game balls to each winning hole. That is, the payout control board 170 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball request signal.

Then, the gaming control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the main control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 (see FIG. 23). (after about 4 msec), the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed again. In the output process (S101) of the main side timer interrupt process (S005) executed again, the gaming control microcomputer 101 outputs the command set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the previous main side timer interrupt process (S005). etc. is output.

[2-1. Sensor detection processing]
In the sensor detection processing (S104), general winning hole sensor processing, gate sensor processing, second starting hole sensor processing, first starting hole sensor processing, first big winning hole sensor processing, second big winning hole sensor processing, specific area Perform sensor processing sequentially. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

In the general winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the general winning hole sensor. In addition, a command for the general winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the gate sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the regular symbol retention storage section 106 provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the common symbol reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random number is not stored. Furthermore, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 2-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 2-related random number is is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 2 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. Ru. In addition, when the special figure 2 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 2 related random number is not stored. Further, a second pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 2 related random number and the second pre-reading determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 2 pending number command representing the number of special figure 2 related random numbers (special figure 2 pending number) stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b and a second look-ahead judgment are executed. A second starting port sensor command including a second starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 1-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 1-related random number is is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 1 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. Ru. In addition, when the special figure 1 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 1 related random number is not stored. Moreover, the first pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 related random number and the first pre-reading determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 1 pending number command representing the number of special figure 1 related random numbers (special figure 1 pending number) stored in the special figure 1 pending storage unit 105a and a first look-ahead judgment are executed. A command for the first starting port sensor including a first starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor. In addition, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor. In addition, a command for the second big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor. Further, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

[2-2. Normal operation processing]
In the normal operation process (S105), a normal symbol standby process, a normal symbol variation process, a normal symbol confirmation process, and an auxiliary game control process are sequentially performed. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not being performed. In the normal symbol standby process, a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 106. In addition, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state to determine a normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, a normal pattern variation start command including information regarding the result of the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern is generated. Then, based on the general pattern fluctuation time associated with the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern, the general pattern display 82 starts variable display of the general pattern.

The normal symbol variation process is a process that is performed during the variable display of the normal symbol. In the ordinary symbol variation process, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result in response to the elapse of the ordinary symbol fluctuation time after the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol that is being executed. Then, a general pattern variation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the general pattern is generated.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process, when a predetermined stopping time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol being executed starts, the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. Determine whether it exists or not. If the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of the auxiliary game is generated.

The auxiliary game control process is a process that is performed when an auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process, the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. In addition, an auxiliary game control command is generated according to the result of the processing.

[2-3. Special operation processing]
In the special operation process (S106), a special symbol standby process, a special symbol variation process, a special symbol confirmation process, a jackpot game control process, and a game state setting process are sequentially performed. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

[2-3-1. Special symbol standby process]
The special symbol standby process is a process that is performed not in the jackpot game state but during standby when the special symbol is not variably displayed. In the special symbol standby process, special symbol 2 determination processing and special symbol 2 variation pattern determination processing are performed based on the special symbol 2 related random numbers stored in the special symbol 2 reservation storage section 105b, and the special symbol 2 reservation storage section Perform shift processing. Also, based on the special figure 1-related random numbers stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a, special figure 1 determination processing and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing are performed, and special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing is performed. .

The special symbol 2 determination process uses the special symbol random number among the special symbol 2 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special symbol 2 pending storage section 105b and the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state. Then, a jackpot determination is made to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. If the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, jackpot symbol type determination is performed to determine the type of jackpot symbol using the jackpot symbol type random number of the special symbol 2 related random numbers and the special symbol 2 jackpot symbol type determination table. Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined jackpot symbol type is generated. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing the loss is generated.

The special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is a process performed after the special figure 2 determination process. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern random number among the special figure 2 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b and the special figure 2 according to the current gaming state are used. The special figure 2 variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table. Note that the determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 2 related random numbers (the number of special figure 2 reservations) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b. Then, a special figure 2 variation start command representing the determined special figure 2 variation pattern is generated. The special figure 2 variation start command includes information about the special figure 2, information about the result of jackpot determination, information about the result of reach determination, information about the special figure variation time associated with the special figure 2 variation pattern, etc. included. Then, the special figure 2 display 81b starts variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time associated with the determined special figure 2 variation pattern.

The special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift process is a process that is performed when the special figure 2 determination process and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process are performed. In the special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 2 related random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted by one to the first area side, and the special figure 2 related random number in the first area is shifted to the special figure 2 related random number in the first area. Clear from the pending storage section 105b in FIG. In this way, the special figure 2 related random numbers are digested in the order they were acquired. Then, a special figure 2 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 2 reservations after the processing is generated.

The special symbol 1 determination process uses the special symbol random number of the special symbol 1 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special symbol 1 reservation storage section 105a and the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state. Then, a jackpot determination is made to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. If the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, jackpot symbol type determination is performed to determine the type of jackpot symbol using the jackpot symbol type random number of the special symbol 1 related random numbers and the special symbol 1 jackpot symbol type determination table. Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined jackpot symbol type is generated. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing the loss is generated.

The special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is a process performed after the special figure 1 determination process. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern random number of the special figure 1 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a and the special figure 1 according to the current gaming state are used. The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table. Note that the determination of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 1 related random numbers (the number of special figure 1 reservations) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. Then, a special figure 1 variation start command representing the determined special figure 1 variation pattern is generated. The special figure 1 variation start command includes information related to the special figure 1, information related to the result of jackpot judgment, information related to the result of reach judgment, information related to the result of jackpot type judgment, and information associated with the special figure 1 variation pattern. Contains information such as special figure fluctuation time. Then, based on the special figure fluctuation time associated with the determined special figure 1 variation pattern, the special figure 1 display 81a starts variable display of the special figure 1.

The special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process is a process that is performed when the special figure 1 determination process and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process are performed. In the special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 1 related random number stored in the special figure 1 reserve storage unit 105a is shifted by one to the first area side, and the special figure 1 related random number in the first area is shifted to the special figure 1 related random number in the first area. Clear from the pending storage section 105a in FIG. In this way, the special figure 1 related random numbers are digested in the order they were acquired. Then, a special figure 1 reservation number command representing the special figure 1 reservation number after the processing is generated.

In addition, in this embodiment, when both the number of reserved special figures 2 and the number of reserved special figures 1 exist, the special figure 2 determination process is performed with priority, and the variable display of special figure 2 and the variable display of special figure 1 are performed. and are not performed in parallel.

[2-3-2. Special symbol variation processing]
The special symbol variation process is a process performed during variable display of the special symbol. In the special symbol variation process, as the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol display device 81 ends the variable display of the special symbol and stops displaying the special symbol according to the result of the jackpot determination. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, a loss symbol indicating a loss is stopped and displayed. Then, a special figure variation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the special figure is generated.

[2-3-3. Special design confirmation process]
The special symbol confirmation process is a process that is performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol confirmation process, if the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol, a transition is made to a jackpot game state. Then, an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot game is generated. The opening command includes information regarding the result of jackpot type determination. Further, when the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a losing symbol and the high probability state is to be ended, the normal probability state is set. Then, a high probability termination command indicating transition to the normal probability state is generated. Further, when the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a losing symbol and the time saving state is to be ended, a non-time saving state is set. Then, a time-saving end command indicating transition to a non-time-saving state is generated. Furthermore, if the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a losing symbol, and the number of special symbols 2 and 1 pending are "0", the pachinko game machine PY1 is in a waiting state, indicating that it is waiting for a customer. Generate a command.

[2-3-4. Jackpot game control processing]
The jackpot game control process is a process performed in the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game control process, a jackpot game is performed using the jackpot game control table. After transition to the jackpot game state, each round game is started according to the passage of opening time or closing time. Then, a round game command indicating the start of a round game is generated. Furthermore, in response to ending the final round game, an ending is started. Then, an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot game is generated. The ending command includes information regarding the result of jackpot type determination.

[2-3-5. Game state setting processing]
The game state setting process is a process that is performed when the jackpot game state ends. In the gaming state setting process, when changing from the normal probability state to the high probability state, the high probability state is set at the end of the jackpot gaming state. When restricting the duration of the high probability state, the duration of the high probability state (for example, the number of variable display times of the special symbol that allows the high probability state to continue without winning the jackpot) is also set. Then, a high probability setting command indicating setting of a high probability state is generated. Further, when changing from a non-time saving state to a time saving state, the time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game state. When limiting the duration of the time-saving state, the duration of the time-saving state (for example, the number of variable display times of the special symbol that allows the time-saving state to continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. Then, a time saving setting command indicating setting of the time saving state is generated.

Note that the commands generated by the game control microcomputer 101 in each process can be added or changed as appropriate.

6. Control of performance by microcomputer 121 for performance control Next, control of performance by microcomputer 121 for performance control will be explained based on FIGS. 25 and 26. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the following explanation of the control of the performance by the performance control microcomputer 121 are provided in the performance RAM 124.

[1. Sub control main processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the sub-control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 25 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, a power-on process is first performed in response to power-on (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. As an example, the method of updating the random number counter for performance determination for various performances can be the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing performed by the main control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing performed by the main control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140. The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a (performs various effects using the image) according to the received command. In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 140, the sub-control board 120 also outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various audio effects), and controls lamps. Via the circuit 151, the frame lamp 53 and the panel lamp 54 are made to emit light (to perform various light emitting effects by emitting light), and the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are activated (to perform various movable body effects by operation). execute). The performance RAM 124 is provided with a starting winning command suspension storage section that stores a starting winning command including pending lottery information. The pending lottery information includes information based on each random number stored in the special figure pending storage section 105 of the main control board 100. The starting winning command suspension storage unit further includes a first starting winning command holding storage unit that stores a first starting winning command based on the first special figure holding, and a second starting winning command holding storage unit that stores a second starting winning command based on the second special drawing holding. A 2-start winning command pending storage section is provided. In addition, the performance RAM 124 may be provided with a storage unit that stores commands including information on holding common drawings. In detail, the first starting winning command suspension storage section and the second starting winning command suspension storage section are each provided with a storage area corresponding to the upper limit number of special symbol reservations. In pachinko gaming machine PY1, four storage areas are provided in the first starting winning command holding storage section, and four storage areas are also provided in the second starting winning command holding storage section, in accordance with the upper limit number of special symbols pending. It will be done. Furthermore, each storage area is provided with a plurality of small areas. Specifically, in the pachinko game machine PY1, a start winning command specified based on the winning of the starting opening and data indicating the display mode of the pending icon HA are stored in each small area. The reception counter is used to manage the winning order.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010) and sub-side timer interrupt processing (S4011) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time various commands sent from the main control board 100 are input to the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output processing (S101) of the main control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011).

[2. Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 msec period) is input to the sub control board 120. In the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 26, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable device control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In the input processing, an operation on an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the normal button detection switch 40a or the special button detection switch 41a, is detected. In the light emission data output process, the light emission data is output in order to cause lamps such as the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 to emit light at a timing that matches the image effect, etc., based on the effect data created in the effect data creation process described later. is output to the lamp control circuit 151. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, etc. to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable device control process, drive data is output in order to perform a movable body performance that operates movable devices such as movable devices 55, 56, and 58 at predetermined timings based on the performance data created in the performance data creation process. do. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a movable body performance in which the movable devices 55, 56, 58, etc. are operated in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. In the watchdog timer process, the watchdog timer is reset. In the switch process, the display contents of the display unit 50a are set based on data of operations on operation units that can be operated by the player, such as the normal button detection switch 40a and the special button detection switch 41a, detected in the input process. In the button validity period process, the button operation validity period of various buttons (normal button 40, special button 41, etc.) is set. As a result, for example, the operation effect is performed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, and the button operation valid period occurs.

[10ms timer interrupt processing] The 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012), as shown in FIG. 27, received command analysis process (S4201), effect timer update process (S4202), audio control process (S4203), and effect data creation process (S4204) are sequentially performed. .

In the received command analysis process, the command stored in the reception buffer of the performance RAM 124 by the reception interrupt process (S4010) is analyzed, and processing according to the command (for example, selection of performance, setting of performance mode, setting of commands, etc.) I do. In the performance timer update process, a timer for measuring time related to each performance is updated. For example, in the performance timer update process, the start timing and end timing of the operation valid period of the operation units such as the normal button 40 and the special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls audio output from the speaker 52) is created and output to the audio control circuit 161 based on the processing result of the received command analysis process. In the presentation data creation process, presentation data is created based on the processing result of the received command analysis process.

In the switch process (S4106), the production control microcomputer 121 may analyze the switch data acquired in the input process (S4104) and determine whether or not the normal button 40 has been pressed within the valid button operation period. be. For example, if the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the switch data acquired through the input process (S4104) and determines that the normal button 40 has been pressed within the valid button operation period, it executes the normal button process. . Here, the normal button processing is, for example, a process of displaying a preview image on the display section 50a, or performing a movable object effect using the on-board movable object 55k. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 may analyze the switch data acquired through the input process (S4104) and determine whether or not the special button 41 has been pressed within the valid button operation period. For example, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the special button 41 has been pressed within the valid button operation period, special button processing is executed. Here, the special button process is, for example, a process of displaying a preview image on the display unit 50a, or performing a movable body effect using the on-board movable body 55k.

Here, an example of processing when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the production control microcomputer 121 is a variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command). If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that a variation start command has been received in the received command analysis process (S4201), the production control microcomputer 121 performs variation based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the command as a process when receiving the variation start command. A production pattern (sub variation pattern) of the production is selected, information on the sub variation pattern is set, and a variation production start command including information on the sub variation pattern is set in the output buffer. For example, if the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is SP variation (variation pattern associated with SP reach), select a sub variation pattern that performs SP reach, and use the variation production start command corresponding to that sub variation pattern. set in the output buffer. After that, each process (command transmission process (S4004), light emission data output process (S4102), movable body control process (S4103), voice control process (S4203), etc.) is executed to correspond to the selected sub fluctuation pattern. A fluctuating performance is realized. The processing flow for realizing such performances is basically the same for other performances such as performances associated with special games, customer waiting performances, look-ahead performances, so-called preview performances accompanying such fluctuations, and control of performance modes. It's the same.

7. Description of Features of Pachinko Gaming Machine PY1 of First Embodiment Below, the features of Pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained in detail. The first embodiment will be described below. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above is also applied to the first embodiment.

First, the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment will be explained. The game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment uses the results of the jackpot determination, the reach determination result, and A special figure 1 variation pattern is determined based on the special figure variation pattern random number. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 selects "P01", "P02", "P03", and "P21" as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. ” or “P22”, it is possible to determine any special figure 1 variation pattern. The distribution ratio is as shown in FIG. 29(A). Note that the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 variation pattern shown in FIG. 29(A) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is a loss in the jackpot determination, and the result of the reach determination is "reach", the game control microcomputer 101 selects "P04" and "P05" as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. , "P06", "P23", or "P24", it is possible to determine any special figure 1 variation pattern. Which special figure 1 variation pattern is determined is determined by the special figure variation pattern random number. The distribution ratio is as shown in FIG. 29(B). Note that the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 variation pattern shown in FIG. 29(B) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is a loss in the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination is "no reach", the game control microcomputer 101 selects "P07" or "P08" as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. ” can be determined. Which of these two types of special figure 1 variation patterns is determined is determined by the number of special figure 1 reservations. When the number of special figure 1 reservations is 0 to 2, a special figure fluctuation pattern with a relatively long special figure fluctuation time is likely to be determined, and when the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 to 4, the special figure fluctuation pattern Special figure fluctuation patterns that take a relatively short time are easier to determine. The distribution ratio is as shown in FIG. 29(C). Note that the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 variation pattern shown in FIG. 29(C) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" is a joint jackpot variation in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development effect → SP reach → branching effect → cooperation reach, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23" is, It is a cooperative loss variation in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development effect → SP reach → branching effect → cooperative reach is performed. Here, the branch performance is a performance that is executed at the performance branch point (predetermined branch point) that branches to either reach among the joint fight reach or battle reach in the special symbol variation performance.

Here, collaborative reach is a victory performance in which the main character and his ally characters cooperate in a battle against an enemy character, and in the end, the main character wins (an example of a successful performance), or a victory performance in which the main character wins This is a performance that branches to a defeat performance (an example of a failure performance) (see FIG. 68). In addition, joint reach is a reach effect that suggests that the possibility that the jackpot determination result is a "jackpot" is higher than SP reach, L reach, and N reach, and is intended to make players expect a jackpot. It functions as a performance. Note that the cooperative reach and the battle reach (low expectation transition performance) described later are SPSP reach (suggestive performance, expected transition performance). In addition, the collaborative reach (high expectation transition performance) is a reach performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" is higher than the battle reach described later. In joint reach, a successful performance is a performance that suggests a jackpot win, and a failure performance is a performance that suggests a loss.

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" is a battle jackpot variation in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development effect → SP reach → branch effect → battle reach, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24" is, It is a battle loss variation where normal variation → reach → N reach → development effect → SP reach → branching effect → battle reach is performed.

Here, Battle Reach is a battle between the main character and the enemy character, and in the end, a victory performance in which the main character wins (an example of a successful performance), or a defeat performance in which the main character is defeated (an example of a failure performance) ) (see Figure 67). In addition, Battle Reach is a reach effect that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" than SP Reach, L Reach, and N Reach, and is intended to make players expect a jackpot. It functions as a performance. However, Battle Reach is a reach effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" is lower than in Collaborative Reach. In Battle Reach, a successful performance is a performance that suggests winning a jackpot, and a failure performance is a performance that suggests a loss.

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01" is a SP jackpot variation in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development effect → SP reach, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04" is normal variation → reach → N reach This is the SP loss fluctuation where reach → development performance → SP reach is performed.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02" is the L jackpot variation in which the normal variation → reach → N reach → development effect → L reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05" is the normal variation → reach → N reach It is an L loss variation where reach → development performance → L reach is performed.

In addition, the special pattern 1 variation pattern "P03" is normal variation → reach → N reach, so that the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 become reach, but L reach, SP reach, or SPSP reach (cooperative reach, battle reach) ), this is an N jackpot fluctuation in which no reach effect is performed. In addition, the special pattern 1 variation pattern "P06" is normal variation → reach → N reach, so that the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 become reach, but L reach, SP reach, or SPSP reach (cooperative reach, battle reach) ), this is an N loss variation in which no reach effect is performed.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P07" is a normal loss variation in which the variation performance ends in 13 seconds without the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 becoming reach. Moreover, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P08" shown in FIG. 27 is a normal loss variation in which the variation performance ends in 4 seconds without the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 becoming reach.

Next, among the main effects (normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, SPSP reach (cooperative reach, battle reach)) that make up the special pattern variation effects in the above-mentioned special pattern variation pattern, SPSP reach is. Cooperative Reach and Battle Reach will be explained in detail. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays a performance image on the display section 50a in each performance that constitutes the special figure variation performance, and also controls light emission using the frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 according to the display of the performance image. Production, sound production using the speaker 52, movable body production using the movable devices 55, 56, 58 (movable body production in the first production mode, movable body production in the second production mode, etc.), input device (normal button 40, special buttons 41) can be used to perform operations and the like.

<Joint Reach>
Collaborative reach is a reach effect in which the main character cooperates with an ally character and battles an enemy character. There is a win/loss branch in the cooperative reach, which branches into a success performance (victory performance) in which the main character wins against the enemy character, or a failure performance (defeat performance) in which the main character is defeated by the enemy character (see FIG. 68). The success performance, like the success performance in battle reach, functions as a performance that suggests to the player that he has won a jackpot. The failure performance, like the failure performance in battle reach, functions as a performance that suggests to the player that he has not won the jackpot.

<Battle Reach>
Battle reach is a reach effect in which a main character and an enemy character engage in a battle. Battle reach has a win/loss branch, and branches into a success performance (victory performance) in which the main character wins against the enemy character, or a failure performance (defeat performance) in which the main character is defeated by the enemy character (see FIG. 67). The success performance, like the success performance in joint reach, functions as a performance that suggests to the player that he has won a jackpot. Similar to the failure performance in joint reach, the failure performance functions as a performance that suggests to the player that he has not won the jackpot.

Next, the distribution rate of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the non-time saving state will be explained using FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29(A), in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the distribution rate of the special pattern 1 variation pattern selected in the case of "non-time saving state" and "jackpot" is Distribution rate of pattern “P03” (1%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern “P02” (9%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern “P01” (20%) ⇒ Special figure 1 The distribution rate of the fluctuation pattern "P22" (30%) is higher in the order of the distribution ratio of the special map 1 fluctuation pattern "P21" (40%).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29(B), in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, the distribution rate of the special symbol 1 variation pattern selected in the case of "non-time saving state" and "loss with reach" is Figure 1 Distribution rate of variation pattern “P23” (10%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern “P24” (20%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern “P04” (22%) ⇒ The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05" (23%) is higher than the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P06" (25%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 29(C), in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, in the "non-time saving state", the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "0 to 2", and "no reach loss" The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in this case is the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P08" (20%) ⇒ the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P07" (80%) are increasing in order of

In addition, as shown in FIG. 29(C), in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, in the "non-time saving state", the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "3 to 4", and there is a "no reach loss". The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in this case is the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P07" (20%) ⇒ the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P08" (80%) in order of increasing

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when a jackpot is won (in the case of jackpot fluctuation), cooperative reach is easier to execute than battle reach. On the other hand, in the case of a loss (when the loss fluctuates), battle reach is easier to execute than cooperative reach. In other words, in this embodiment, the collaborative reach is a reach performance with higher expectations for a jackpot than the battle reach. In addition, in the winning/losing branch of various SPSP reach (cooperative reach, battle reach), it may be configured to perform an operation performance that causes the operation section (normal button 40 or special button 41) to be operated.

Next, when the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment is in a non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a prefetch determination using the first prefetch determination table shown in FIG. 30 based on the acquired special figure related random number. . This look-ahead judgment includes a jackpot look-ahead judgment as to whether or not the acquired special pattern pattern random number is judged to be a "jackpot" in the jackpot judgment, and a jackpot look-ahead judgment as to whether the acquired special pattern pattern random number is judged as a "jackpot" in the special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment. This includes pre-reading of the variation pattern to determine which special figure variation pattern is to be determined. The game control microcomputer 101 determines a start winning command based on the result of the pre-read determination. In the first embodiment, the first read-ahead determination table shown in FIG. 28 is used, but it is also possible to use the first read-ahead determination table shown in FIG. 13 in combination.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines a starting prize command based on the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination or the result of the variable pattern look-ahead determination in the first start opening sensor process when the non-time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 30, 11 types of starting winning commands such as "Command 01" to "Command 07" and "Command 21" to "Command 24" can be determined as the starting winning command. In the first embodiment, a variation pattern pre-read determination is performed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern determined by the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

When the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "jackpot" and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "cooperative jackpot fluctuation", "command 21" is determined. Further, when the result of the jackpot pre-reading determination is "jackpot" and the result of the fluctuation pattern pre-reading determination is "battle jackpot fluctuation", "command 22" is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "jackpot" and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "SP jackpot fluctuation", "command 01" is determined. If the result of the jackpot pre-reading determination is "jackpot" and the result of the fluctuation pattern pre-reading determination is "L jackpot variation", "command 02" is determined. When the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "jackpot" and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "N jackpot fluctuation", "command 03" is determined.

Further, when the result of the jackpot pre-reading determination is a "lose" and the result of the variable pattern pre-reading determination is "cooperative loss fluctuation", "command 23" is determined. Further, when the result of the jackpot pre-reading determination is a "lose" and the result of the variable pattern pre-reading determination is "battle loss variation", "command 24" is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is a "loss" and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "SP loss variation," "command 04" is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "Lose" and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "L loss variation", "Command 05" is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is a "loss" and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "N loss variation," "command 06" is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "lose" and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "normal loss fluctuation", "command 07" is determined.

Next, the pending icon HA and the icon TA that can be displayed by the performance control microcomputer 121 of this embodiment will be explained. The production control microcomputer 121 can display the pending icon HA corresponding to the special figure 1 pending in the pending icon display area 50d in the pending production, and display the corresponding icon TA corresponding to the special figure 1 pending in the icon display area 50e. It can be displayed (see FIG. 32).

The hold icon HA of the first embodiment includes a hold icon HA1 (white circle) in the normal display mode shown in FIG. 31(A), and a hold icon HA1 (white circle) in the change suggestion display mode (specific display mode) shown in FIG. 31(E). There is an icon HA2 (a white triangle containing a character image being prepared). Further, the icon TA of the first embodiment includes the icon TA1 (white circle) in the normal display mode shown in FIG. 31(A), and the expectation level display shown in FIGS. 31(B) to 31(D). The icons TA2 to TA4 in the mode, the icon TA5 (white triangle containing the character image being prepared) in the change suggestion display mode shown in FIG. 31(E), and the icons in FIG. 31(F) to FIG. 31(G). There are icons TA6 to TA7 in the development suggestion display mode shown in FIG.

The icons of various display modes will be explained. First, the icons (holding icon HA1, icon TA1) in the normal display mode (predetermined display mode) are the icons that are most frequently selected in the case of a loss. Next, the icons in the expectation level display mode (the icons TA2 to TA4) are selected less frequently in the event of a loss than the icon TA1 in the normal display mode. Note that the shape of the icon for the expectation level display mode (the icons TA2 to TA4) and the shape of the icon TA1 for the normal display mode are the same round shape, but the icons for the expectation level display mode (expectation display mode, special display mode) The colors of the icons TA2 to TA4) and the color of the icon TA1 in the normal display mode are different.

The icons of the expectation level display mode (the icons TA2 to TA4) include the icon TA2 (blue circle, see FIG. 31(B)) of the first expectation level display mode (first special display mode), and the second expectation level display mode (the icon TA2 to TA4). The corresponding icon TA3 (green circle, see FIG. 31(C)) in the degree display mode (first expected display mode, second special display mode) and the corresponding icon in the third expectation display mode (second expected display mode) There is TA4 (red circle, see FIG. 31(D)). The shape of the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the shape of the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, and the shape of the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode are all the same round shape. The color of the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the color of the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, and the color of the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode are different from each other. In this embodiment, the icon TA1 (white circle) in the normal display mode ⇒ the icon TA2 (blue circle) in the first expectation display mode ⇒ the icon TA3 (green circle) in the second expectation display mode )⇒The jackpot expectation level increases in the order of the icon TA4 (red circle) in the third expectation level display mode.

Next, the icons in the change suggestion display mode (the pending icon HA5, the relevant icon TA5, a white triangle containing the character image being prepared, see FIG. 31(E)) are the icons in the normal display mode (the pending icon HA1, the relevant icon This icon is selected less frequently in the case of a loss than TA1). The icons in the change suggestion display mode include a hold icon HA5 in the change suggestion display mode and the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode. The icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode (the pending icon HA5, the icon TA5) is displayed in the second icon change production that can be performed during the execution of the special figure variation production. This icon indicates that the icon is to be changed to either the icon TA6 in the suggestion display mode or the icon TA7 in the battle development suggestion display mode, which will be described later. The cooperation development suggestion display mode and the battle development suggestion display mode correspond to the "special display mode" of the present invention.

The icon TA6 of the development suggestion display mode (the icon TA6 is composed of the character image of battle and a white triangle image shown in FIG. 31(F), and the icon TA6 is composed of the character image of cooperation and a white triangle image shown in FIG. 31(G)). The icon TA7) is selected less frequently in the event of a loss than the icon in the normal display mode. The icon in the development suggestion display mode is the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode (a white triangle containing a battle character image shown in FIG. 31(F)), and the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode (FIG. 31 There is a white triangle containing the character image of cooperation shown in (G)). Here, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode is the icon that indicates that the game will develop into a battle reach during the execution of the special symbol variation effect. In addition, the icon TA7 in the cooperative development suggestion display mode is the icon that indicates that a cooperative reach is developed during execution of the special symbol variation effect. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of the icon TA1 in the normal display mode, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, and the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode.

Next, the icon TA and the hold icon HA displayed on the display section 50a will be further explained based on FIG. 32. In this embodiment, by displaying the icon TA on the display unit 50a, it is notified that the special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2) is being variably displayed (or being stopped and displayed). Further, by displaying the hold icon HA on the display unit 50a, the player is informed of the number of special drawings 1 or 2 held.

The icon TA of this embodiment includes a period from the variable display of the special figure 1 to the stop display on the special figure 1 display 81a, and a period from the variable display of the special figure 2 to the stop display on the special figure 2 display 81b, It can be continuously displayed in the icon display area 50e. For example, when the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e, as shown in FIGS. 32(A) and 32(D), the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed. It can be continuously displayed in the display area 50e.

Further, the number of pending icons HA of this embodiment can be displayed in the pending icon display area 50d in accordance with the number displayed on the special figure 1 pending display 83a or the number displayed on the special figure 2 pending display 83b. . Specifically, when the number of displays on the special figure 1 hold display 83a is "1", the hold icon HA1 in the normal display mode is displayed only in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d (Fig. 32 (See (A)). That is, in that case, one hold icon HA is displayed in the hold icon display area 50d.

Further, when the number of displays on the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is "2", the reservation icon HA1 in the normal display mode is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2 of the reservation icon display area 50d. (See FIG. 20(C)). That is, in that case, two hold icons HA1 in the normal display mode are displayed in the hold icon display area 50d.

In addition, when the number of displays on the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is "3", the normal display mode is reserved in the first display area 50d1, second display area 50d2, and third display area 50d3 of the reservation icon display area 50d. Icon HA1 is displayed. That is, in that case, three pending icons HA in the normal display mode are displayed in the pending icon display area 50d.

In addition, when the number of displays on the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is "4", the first display area 50d1, the second display area 50d2, the third display area 50d3, and the fourth display area 50d4 of the reservation icon display area 50d. A hold icon HA1 in a normal display mode is displayed. That is, in that case, four pending icons HA1 in the normal display mode are displayed in the pending icon display area 50d.

As mentioned above, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is for displaying the number of special figure 1 reservations (the number of times when the variable display of special figure 1 on the special figure 1 display 81a is pending), so the reservation icon By displaying the reservation icon HA in the display area 50d, the player can grasp the current number of reserved special drawings 1. In addition, since the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is for displaying the number of special figure 2 reservations (the number of special figures 2 whose variable display is pending on the special figure 2 display 81b), the reservation icon display area 50d By displaying the pending icon HA in , the player can grasp the current number of special drawings 2 pending.

Further, the hold icon HA can be displayed together with the icon TA during the variable display of the special figure (variable display of the special figure 1, variable display of the special figure 2). That is, the variable display of the special figure (variable display of special figure 1, variable display of special figure 2), when the relevant icon TA is displayed in the relevant icon display area 50e, the display on the special figure 1 pending display 83a or the number of pending icons HA corresponding to the number displayed on the special figure 2 pending display 83b is also displayed in the pending icon display area 50d.

In this embodiment, during the stop display of the special figure (stop display of special figure 1, stop display of special figure 2), the display of the icon TA displayed in the icon display area 50e ends. That is, during the stop display of the special figure (stop display of special figure 1, stop display of special figure 2), the icon TA displayed in the icon display area 50e disappears from the icon display area 50e.

Specifically, during the variable display of special figure 1, if the pending icon HA is not displayed and the icon TA is displayed, the execution of the icon TA ends while the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. , disappears from the icon display area 50e (see FIG. 32(C)).

When the icon TA disappears from the icon display area 50e, it is displayed in the first display area 50d1 by the start of the variable display of the next special figure (variable display of special figure 1, variable display of special figure 2). The pending icon HA that was previously displayed moves (shifts) from the first display area 50d1 to the icon display area 50e, and becomes the icon TA1 in the normal display mode (see FIGS. 32(C) and 32(D)). By displaying the icon TA in this way, the player can understand that the variable display of the next special figure (variable display of special figure 1, variable display of special figure 2) has started.

In the first embodiment, display patterns from the start of display of the hold icon HA until the end of display of the hold icon HA are collectively selected as a scenario. As shown in FIG. 33, there are two types of scenario patterns for displaying the hold icon HA: prefetch scenario pattern 1 to prefetch scenario pattern 2. Prefetch scenario pattern 1 is a scenario in which the hold icon HA1 in the normal display mode, which is the initial mode of the hold icon HA, continues to be displayed without being changed. Further, the prefetch scenario pattern 2 is a scenario in which the pending icon HA2 in the change suggestion display mode of the pending icon HA continues to be displayed without being changed.

The production control microcomputer 121 can select the type of pending icon HA to be displayed in the pending icon display area 50d using the prefetch scenario pattern selection table shown in FIG. In the starting winning process (S4302), the performance control microcomputer 121 selects the prefetching scenario pattern 1 or the prefetching scenario pattern 2 with reference to the starting winning command. Specifically, regardless of whether the starting winning command is any one of "command 01" to "command 07", prefetch scenario pattern 1 is selected 100% of the time, and prefetch scenario pattern 2 is selected. Never. When the starting winning command is "command 21", prefetch scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 90%, and prefetch scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the starting winning command is "command 22", prefetch scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 95%, and prefetch scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 5%. Further, when the starting winning command is "command 23", the pre-reading scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 90%, and the pre-reading scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the starting winning command is "command 24", pre-reading scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 95%, and pre-reading scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 5%. Note that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the scenario pattern selection table for the pending icon shown in FIG. 34 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, display patterns from the start of display of the icon TA until the end of display of the icon TA are collectively selected as a scenario. As shown in FIG. 35, there are eight types of scenario patterns for displaying the icon TA, from scenario pattern 1 to scenario pattern 8. The scenario pattern 1 is a scenario in which the icon TA1 in the normal display mode, which is the initial mode of the icon TA, continues to be displayed without being changed. Further, in the scenario pattern 2, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed, and by executing the first icon change effect, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, This is a scenario in which the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode continues to be displayed. Further, in the scenario pattern 3, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed, and by executing the first icon change effect, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, This is a scenario in which the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode continues to be displayed. In addition, in the scenario pattern 3, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed, and by executing the first icon change effect, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode, This is a scenario in which the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode continues to be displayed.

In the scenario pattern 5, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is displayed, and by executing the second icon change effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, and then This is a scenario in which the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode by executing the third icon change effect, and the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode continues to be displayed. . In the scenario pattern 6, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is displayed, and by executing the second icon change effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, and then This is a scenario in which the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode by executing the third icon change effect, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode continues to be displayed. . In the scenario pattern 7, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is displayed, and by executing the second icon change effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode, and then This is a scenario in which the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode by executing the third icon change effect, and the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode continues to be displayed. . In the scenario pattern 8, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is displayed, and by executing the second icon change effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode, and then This is a scenario in which the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode by executing the third icon change effect, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode continues to be displayed. .

In the scenario pattern selection process (S4504), the performance control microcomputer 121 can select the type of the icon TA to be displayed in the icon display area 50e using the scenario pattern selection table shown in FIG. In the scenario pattern selection process (S4504), the production control microcomputer 121 refers to the type of special symbol variation pattern and the selected pre-read scenario pattern, and selects any one of the scenario patterns 1 to 8. Select the corresponding scenario pattern. Specifically, when the special map 1 fluctuation pattern is "P01" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 20%, and the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 80%. Selected in percentage. When the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is "P02" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 20%, and the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 80%. be done. When the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is "P03" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 20%, and the scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 80%. be done. When the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is "P04" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 80%, and the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 20%. be done. When the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is "P05" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 80%, and the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 20%. be done. No matter which special figure 1 variation pattern is selected from "P06" to "P08", if look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the ratio of scenario pattern 1 is 100%. is selected.

Moreover, when the special figure 1 variation pattern is from "P21" to "P24", the selection ratio of the scenario pattern is different depending on the selected prefetch scenario pattern 1 or prefetch scenario pattern 2. Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation pattern is "P21" and the prefetch scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern is "P21" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected, the scenario pattern 7 is selected at a rate of 20%, and the scenario pattern is selected at a rate of 80%. selected. When the special figure 1 variation pattern is "P22" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 20%, and the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 80%. be done. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern is "P22" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected, the scenario pattern 5 is selected at a rate of 40%, and the scenario pattern 6 is selected at a rate of 60%. is selected. When the special figure fluctuation pattern is "P23" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 80%, and the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 20%. Ru. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern is "P23" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected, the scenario pattern 7 is selected at a rate of 80%, and the scenario pattern 8 is selected at a rate of 20%. is selected. When the special figure fluctuation pattern is "P24" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 60%, and the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 40%. Ru. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern is "P24" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected, the scenario pattern 5 is selected at a rate of 60%, and the scenario pattern 6 is selected at a rate of 40%. is selected. Note that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the scenario selection table of the icon shown in FIG. 36 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, an icon change effect in which the display mode of the icon is changed during execution of the special figure change effect will be explained. The icon change effects of the first embodiment include a first icon change effect, a second icon change effect, and a third icon change effect. Here, the first icon change effect is to change the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed on the display unit 50a to the expectation level display mode (first expectation level display mode, second expectation level display mode) during execution of the special figure variation effect. This is an effect that changes the icon TA to the icon TA (display mode, third expectation level display mode). In addition, in the second icon change production, during the execution of the special figure variation production, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed on the display unit 50a is replaced with the icon TA6 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode, or the battle development suggestion display. This is an effect that changes the mode to the icon TA7. In addition, the third icon change effect displays the expectation level of the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode displayed on the display unit 50a or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode while the special figure variation effect is being executed. This is an effect that changes the mode (first expectation level display mode, second expectation level display mode, third expectation level display mode) to the icon TA.

First, the first icon change effect will be specifically explained. When execution of the first icon change effect is started, first, a movable body effect that activates the on-board movable device 55 is executed. Thereafter, when the execution of the movable object effect is completed during execution of the first icon change effect, an on-board movable object image KG (movable object image) imitating the on-board movable object 55k is displayed on the display section 50a. When the on-board movable body image KG is displayed on the display section 50a, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is moved from the icon display area 50e to the icon change area 50h (specific display position). Then, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode moved to the icon change area 50h is changed to the icon TA1 in the expectation display mode (first expectation display mode, second expectation display mode, third expectation display mode). It will be changed to

The first icon change performance includes a first icon change performance in a first performance mode and a first icon change performance in a second performance mode. The first icon change production in the first production mode changes the icon TA1 in the normal display mode to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA3 in the third expectation display mode. This is an icon change effect that changes to any one of the icons TA4. That is, the first icon change performance in the first performance mode changes the icon TA1 in the normal display mode to the icon TA in the expectation display mode that indicates a jackpot expectation higher than the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode. This is an icon change performance. On the other hand, the first icon change performance in the second performance mode is an icon change that changes the icon TA1 in the normal display mode to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode or the icon TA3 in the third expectation display mode. It's a performance. From the above explanation, the first icon change performance in the first performance mode changes the icon TA1 in the normal display mode to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode. This is an icon change effect in which the icon TA4 of the expectation level display mode is changed to any of the expectation level display modes. On the other hand, in the first icon change performance of the second performance mode, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is not changed to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode. The icon change effect is an icon change effect that causes the icon TA in the second expectation level display mode to change to the icon TA in the expectation level display mode indicating a jackpot expectation level of 3 or higher.

Here, the on-board movable body 55k provided on the game board 1 will be explained using FIG. 37. The on-board movable body 55k includes a movable body LED 55L that can emit light, as shown in FIG. 37(A). By driving the motor to cause the on-board movable device 55 to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to move the on-board movable body 55k to an arbitrary position. Specifically, until the execution of the first icon change effect is started, as shown in FIG. (initial position). Note that, as shown in FIG. 37(A), the movable body LED 55L included in the on-board movable body 55k is not emitting light.

In the first embodiment, the first icon change performance in the first performance mode and the first icon change performance in the second performance mode are the performance modes of the movable body performance using the on-board movable body 55k in the first icon change performance. are different. Using FIG. 37(B) to FIG. 37(D), a movable body performance using the on-board movable body 55k in the first icon change performance in the first performance mode and the first icon change performance in the second performance mode We will explain the differences in the presentation mode.

First, using FIGS. 37(B) to 37(C), the movable object presentation in the first presentation mode in the first icon change presentation in the first presentation mode will be described. When execution of the first icon change performance in the first performance mode is started, a movable body performance using the on-board movable body 55k is executed, the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and as shown in FIG. 37(B) The on-board movable body 55k, which is held in the normal standby state (initial position) shown in , moves downward (descends). Note that when execution of the movable body performance is started during the execution of the first icon change performance of the first performance mode, the movable body LED 55L included in the on-board movable body 55k lights up in blue light emission color. Thereafter, the on-board movable body 55k is held in the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C). Note that even when the on-board movable body 55k is held in the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C), the movable body LED 55L included in the on-board movable body 55k is lit in blue light. . Thereafter, when the execution of the movable body effect is completed during the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, the movable body LED 55L included in the on-board movable body 55k is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 37(C) The panel movable body 55k moves upward (raises) from the operating position to the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. 37(B). Note that the operation of the on-board movable body 55k from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C) in the first icon change presentation of the first presentation mode is the "movable mode" of the present invention. This corresponds to the first movable mode.

On the other hand, when execution of the first icon change performance of the second performance mode is started and a movable body performance using the on-board movable body 55k is executed, the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and the figure The on-board movable body 55k held in the normal standby state (initial position) shown in 37(B) moves downward (descends). Note that when execution of the movable body performance is started during execution of the first icon change performance of the second performance mode, the movable body LED 55L included in the on-board movable body 55k lights up in red light emission color. Thereafter, the on-board movable body 55k is held in the operating position shown in FIG. 37(D). Note that even when the on-board movable body 55k is held in the operating position shown in FIG. 37(D), the movable body LED 55L included in the on-board movable body 55k is lit in red. . Thereafter, when the execution of the movable body effect is completed during the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, the movable body LED 55L included in the on-board movable body 55k is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 37(D) The panel movable body 55k moves upward (raises) from the operating position to the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. 37(B). In addition, in the first icon change performance of the second performance mode, the operation of the on-board movable body 55k from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. , corresponds to the second movable mode.

Next, a table showing the execution probability of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. 38 will be explained. In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01", and the scenario When pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determine at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02", and the scenario When pattern 2 or the scenario pattern 3 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determine at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03", and the scenario When pattern 1 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. 38, the non-execution of the first icon change effect is set at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. decide. On the other hand, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03". , when the scenario pattern 2 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determine by percentage. In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04", and the scenario When pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determine at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05", and the scenario When pattern 2 or the scenario pattern 3 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determine at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines which of the special figure 1 variation patterns "P06" to "P08" the information included in the received variation start command is. Even if it is a special figure 1 variation pattern, if the scenario pattern 1 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Decide whether or not to perform the icon change effect at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", When the scenario pattern 4 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. 38, the first icon change effect is executed at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. Determine. On the other hand, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21". , when the said scenario pattern 7 or the said scenario pattern 8 is selected, the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the said special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. The non-execution of is determined at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", and the scenario When pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determine at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22". , when the said scenario pattern 5 or the said scenario pattern 6 is selected, the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the said special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. The non-execution of is determined at a rate of 100%.

In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", and the scenario When pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determine at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23". , when the said scenario pattern 7 or the said scenario pattern 8 is selected, the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the said special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. The non-execution of is determined at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", and the scenario When pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determine at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24". , when the said scenario pattern 5 or the said scenario pattern 6 is selected, the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the said special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. The non-execution of is determined at a rate of 100%. Note that the distribution rate (selection rate) of the execution lottery table for the first icon change effect shown in FIG. 38 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the presentation mode selection table for the first icon change presentation shown in FIG. 39 will be explained. In the first icon change performance selection process (S4507), when the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment decides to execute the first icon change performance during the execution of the special figure variation performance based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. In this step, the presentation mode of the first icon change presentation is determined based on the presentation mode selection table of the first icon change presentation shown in FIG.

First, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01", When the scenario pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 40% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the first icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 60%. In addition, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01", When the scenario pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 20% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the first icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 80%.

In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02", and the scenario When pattern 2 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 100% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. In addition, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02", When the scenario pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 40% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 60%.

In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03", and the scenario When pattern 2 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 100% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG.

In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04", and the scenario When pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04", When the scenario pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 80% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the first icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 20%.

In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05", and the scenario When pattern 2 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 100% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. In addition, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05", When the scenario pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 40%.

In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", and the scenario When pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 20% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 80%.

In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", and the scenario When pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 40% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 60%. In addition, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", When the scenario pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 20% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the first icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 80%.

In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", and the scenario When pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", When the scenario pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 80% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the first icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 20%.

In the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", and the scenario When pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, in the first icon change production selection process (S4507), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", When the scenario pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 80% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second presentation mode of the first icon change presentation is determined at a rate of 20%. Note that the distribution rate (selection rate) of the performance mode selection table for the first icon change performance shown in FIG. 39 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

From the above explanation of FIG. 39, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the first icon change effect is more effective when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot than when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. As a mode, the second presentation mode is more likely to be selected than the first presentation mode. As a result, when the movable body performance of the second performance mode is executed with the first icon change performance of the second performance mode, the movable body performance of the first performance mode is executed with the first icon change performance of the first performance mode. It can be said that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is executed. That is, the operation of the movable body 55k on the panel from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. 37(D) is better than that from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C). This operation of the on-board movable body 55k has a higher jackpot expectation than the operation of the on-board movable body 55k at the operating position. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the red light emission color of the movable body LED 55L in the movable body performance of the second performance mode is higher than the blue color of the movable body LED 55L in the movable body performance of the first performance mode. It can be said that the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than that of the luminescent color. As a result, in the first icon change performance, when the movable body performance in the second performance mode is executed, it is more likely to be a jackpot for the player than when the movable body performance in the first performance mode is executed. It is possible to set expectations for

Next, the execution timing of the first icon change effect in the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern will be explained using FIGS. 40 and 41. First, using FIG. 40, the execution timing of the first icon change performance of the first performance mode in the special figure variation performance based on the special figure 1 variation pattern will be explained. In addition, FIG. 40 shows the first presentation mode in the special pattern variation performance based on any of the special pattern 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P05" and "P21" to "P24". This shows the execution timing of the first icon change effect.

As shown in FIG. 40, execution of the special figure variation effect is started, and then execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is started. Simultaneously with the start of the first icon change performance in the first performance mode, the execution of the movable body performance in the first performance mode is also started. When execution of the movable body performance in the first performance mode is started, the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and the on-board movable body 55k is in the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. 37(B). From there, it moves (descends) toward the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C), and is held at the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C).

Thereafter, when the execution of the movable body performance of the first performance mode is completed in the first icon change performance of the first performance mode, the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and the on-board movable body 55k moves to the figure. 37(C) toward the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. 37(B), and then move (raise) from the operating position shown in FIG. It will be in a retained state. Further, at the same time as the execution of the movable body performance of the first performance mode in the first icon change performance of the first performance mode is completed, a movable body on the board equipped with a movable body LED 55L lit in blue light emission color on the display section 50a. Display of the first board movable body image KG1 imitating the body 55k is started. Furthermore, at the same time as the execution of the movable body effect in the first effect mode in the first icon change effect in the first effect mode ends, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon TA1 in the normal display mode. It will move to area 50h.

Thereafter, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h becomes the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA3 in the third expectation display mode. Among the icons TA4, the icon TA is changed to one of the expectation level display modes. The icon TA in the changed expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h.

Thereafter, at the same time as the display of the first board movable body image KG1 on the display section 50a ends, the execution of the first icon change performance of the first performance mode also ends. Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the first board movable body image KG1 on the display unit 50a ends, the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h and the second expectation display mode Of the icon TA3 in the third expectation display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode, the icon TA in whichever of the expectation display modes is moved to the icon display area 50e (see FIG. 40). .

Next, using FIG. 41, the execution timing of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode in the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern will be explained. In addition, FIG. 41 shows the second presentation mode in the special pattern variation performance based on any of the special pattern 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P05" and "P21" to "P24". This shows the execution timing of the first icon change effect.

As shown in FIG. 41, the execution of the special figure variation effect is started, and then the execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is started. Simultaneously with the start of the first icon change performance in the second performance mode, the execution of the movable body performance in the second performance mode is also started. When execution of the movable body performance in the second performance mode is started, the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and the on-board movable body 55k is in the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. 37(B). From there, it moves (descends) toward the operating position shown in FIG. 37(D), and is held at the operating position shown in FIG. 37(D).

Thereafter, when the execution of the movable body performance of the second performance mode is completed in the first icon change performance of the second performance mode, the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and the on-board movable body 55k moves to the figure. 37(D) toward the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. 37(B), and then move (raise) from the operating position shown in FIG. It will be in a retained state. Further, at the same time as the execution of the movable body performance in the second performance mode ends, a second on-board movable body image imitating the on-board movable body 55k equipped with the movable body LED 55L lit in red light emission color is displayed on the display section 50a. Display of KG2 starts. Furthermore, at the same time as the execution of the movable body performance in the second performance mode ends, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e moves to the icon change area 50h.

Thereafter, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode. The icon TA3 in the changed second expectation display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h.

Thereafter, at the same time as the display of the second board movable body image KG2 on the display section 50a ends, the execution of the first icon change performance of the second performance mode also ends. Further, at the same time as the display of the second board movable body image KG2 on the display section 50a ends, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h or the third expectation display The icon TA4 of the aspect is moved to the icon display area 50e.

Next, an example of the effect when the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect will be explained using FIGS. 42 to 48. First, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45, a presentation example will be described in which the first icon change presentation of the first presentation mode is executed during the execution of the special figure variation presentation. In addition, FIGS. 42 to 45 show the first effect in the special figure variation production based on any of the special figure 1 variation patterns among the special figure 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P05" and "P21" to "P24". This is an example of the effect when the first icon change effect of the aspect is executed.

When the normal production mode is set and the execution of the special symbol variation production is started, as shown in FIG. At the same time, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started.

Moreover, when execution of the special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 42(A), the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. In addition, as shown in FIG. 42(A), since the hold icon HA is not displayed in the hold icon display area 50d, the player is informed that the number of special drawings 1 held is "0". .

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the display section 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with the icon change area 50h. In the first embodiment, when the first icon change effect is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is moved to the icon change area 50h, and the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is expected to be in the icon change area 50h. The display mode of the icon will be changed to the corresponding icon.

When the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, the movable body effect of the first effect mode is executed, and as shown in FIG. 42(B), the movable body on the board 55k covers the upper portion of the display section 50a of the image display device 50, making it difficult to see the upper portion of the display section 50a of the image display device 50. Note that, as shown in FIG. 42(B), the movable body LED 55L provided on the on-board movable body 55k lights up with blue light emission color.

Thereafter, when the execution of the movable body performance of the first performance mode is completed during the execution of the first icon change performance of the first performance mode, as shown in FIG. 42(C), the on-board movable body 55k is equipped As the movable body LED 55L goes out, the on-board movable body 55k moves (raises) to a predetermined standby position (initial position) (see FIG. 37(B)). In addition, when the execution of the movable body effect is completed during the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, the movable body LED 55L lights up in blue light on the first board imitating the on-board movable body 55k. The movable object image KG1 is displayed at the center of the display section 50a. Further, after the execution of the movable body performance in the first performance mode is completed, the first board movable body image KG1 is subsequently displayed on the display section 50a, thereby surprising the player and giving an impact. becomes possible. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42(C), when the execution of the movable body effect is completed during the execution of the first icon change effect in the first effect mode, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon display area 50e. to the icon change area 50h.

Thereafter, during execution of the first icon change effect in the first effect mode, a first change trigger image IH1 showing one lightning strike is displayed on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 42(D). By displaying the first change trigger image IH1 on the display section 50a, one image is displayed from the first board movable object image KG1 toward the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h. It is possible to show the player that lightning has struck. In the first icon change performance in the first performance mode of the first embodiment, by displaying the first change trigger image IH1 on the display section 50a, the icon in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is displayed. TA1 is the icon TA in any one of the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode. changed to

For example, when the scenario pattern 2 is selected by the performance control microcomputer 121 in the first icon change performance selection process (S4507) and the first icon change performance in the first performance mode is executed, The example of presentation shown in (D) proceeds to the example of presentation shown in FIG. 43(A). As shown in FIG. 43(A), the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h of the display section 50a.

Thereafter, when the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is completed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. The display ends. Further, when the execution of the first icon change in the first presentation mode is completed, as shown in FIG. It is moved to the display area 50e. Then, as shown in FIG. 43(B), the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode that has been moved to the icon display area 50e continues to be displayed.

For example, if the scenario pattern 3 is selected by the performance control microcomputer 121 in the first icon change performance selection process (S4507) and the first icon change performance in the first performance mode is executed, in the case shown in FIG. The production example shown in (D) proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 44(A). As shown in FIG. 44(A), the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h of the display section 50a.

Thereafter, when the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is completed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. The display ends. Further, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the first effect mode is completed, as shown in FIG. It is moved to the icon display area 50e. Then, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode continues to be displayed in the icon display area 50e.

For example, if the scenario pattern 4 is selected by the performance control microcomputer 121 in the first icon change performance selection process (S4507) and the first icon change performance in the first performance mode is executed, The production example shown in (D) proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 45(A). As shown in FIG. 45(A), the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h of the display section 50a.

Thereafter, when the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is completed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. The display ends. Furthermore, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the first effect mode is completed, as shown in FIG. It is moved to the icon display area 50e. Then, as shown in FIG. 45(B), the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode continues to be displayed in the icon display area 50e.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, a presentation example will be described in which the first icon change presentation of the second presentation mode is executed during the execution of the special figure variation presentation. In addition, FIGS. 46 to 48 show the second production in the special pattern variation production based on any of the special pattern 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P05" and "P21" to "P24". This is an example of the effect when the first icon change effect of the aspect is executed.

When the normal production mode is set and the execution of the special symbol variation production is started, as shown in FIG. At the same time, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started.

Moreover, when execution of the special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 46(A), the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. In addition, as shown in FIG. 46(A), since the hold icon HA is not displayed in the hold icon display area 50d, the player is informed that the number of special drawings 1 held is "0". .

As shown in FIG. 46(A), the display section 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with the icon change area 50h. In the first embodiment, when the first icon change effect is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is moved to the icon change area 50h, and the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is expected to be in the icon change area 50h. The display mode of the icon TA will be changed to that of the icon TA.

When the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, the movable body effect of the second effect mode is executed, and as shown in FIG. 46(B), the movable body on the board 55k covers the central portion of the display section 50a of the image display device 50, making the central portion of the display section 50a of the image display device 50 difficult to see. Note that, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the movable body LED 55L provided on the on-board movable body 55k lights up with red light emission color.

Thereafter, when the execution of the movable body performance of the second performance mode is completed during the execution of the first icon change performance of the second performance mode, as shown in FIG. 46(C), the on-board movable body 55k is equipped As the movable body LED 55L goes out, the on-board movable body 55k moves (raises) to a predetermined standby position (initial position) (see FIG. 37(B)). In addition, when the execution of the movable object effect is completed during the execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, a second effect image imitating the on-board movable object 55k equipped with the movable object LED 55L lit in red light emitting color is displayed. The second board movable body image KG2 is displayed at the center of the display section 50a. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 46(C), when the execution of the movable object effect in the second effect mode is completed while the first icon change effect in the second effect mode is being executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes. The icon is moved from the icon display area 50e to the icon change area 50h.

Thereafter, during execution of the first icon change effect in the second effect mode, a second change trigger image IH2 showing two lightning strikes is displayed on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 46(D). By displaying the second change trigger image IH2 on the display section 50a, lightning strikes from the second board movable object image KG2 toward the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h. It is now possible to show the player the following information: In the first icon change performance in the second performance mode of the first embodiment, the second change trigger image IH2 is displayed on the display section 50a, so that the icon in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is displayed. TA1 is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode.

For example, if the scenario pattern 3 is selected by the performance control microcomputer 121 in the first icon change performance selection process (S4507) and the first icon change performance in the second performance mode is executed, The production example shown in FIG. 47(D) proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 47(A). As shown in FIG. 47(A), the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h of the display section 50a.

Thereafter, when the execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is completed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. The display ends. Furthermore, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the second effect mode is completed, as shown in FIG. It is moved to the icon display area 50e. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(B), the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e.

For example, when the scenario pattern 4 is selected by the performance control microcomputer 121 in the first icon change performance selection process (S4507) and the first icon change performance in the second performance mode is executed, in the case shown in FIG. The production example shown in (D) proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 48(A). As shown in FIG. 48(A), the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h of the display section 50a.

Thereafter, when the execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is completed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. The display ends. Furthermore, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the second effect mode is completed, as shown in FIG. It is moved to the icon display area 50e. Then, as shown in FIG. 48(B), the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode continues to be displayed in the icon display area 50e.

Next, we will specifically explain the second icon change effect and the third icon change effect, which are types of preview effects that are executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect. The second icon change effect is a notice of changing the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode. It's a performance. In addition, the third icon change performance is performed using the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e, or the corresponding icon in the cooperation development suggestion display mode, after the execution of the second icon change production is finished. This is a preview effect that changes TA7 to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode.

The table showing the execution probability of the second icon change effect shown in FIG. 49 will be explained. In the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01", and the scenario When selecting pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined in percentage. In the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02", and the scenario When selecting pattern 2 or the scenario pattern 3, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined in percentage. In the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03", and the scenario When selecting pattern 1 or the scenario pattern 2, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined in percentage. In the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04", and the scenario When selecting pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined in percentage. In the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05", and the scenario When selecting pattern 2 or the scenario pattern 3, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined in percentage. In the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P06", "P07", or "P08". Regardless of which of the special figure 1 variation patterns, when selecting the scenario pattern 1, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern is selected based on the table shown in FIG. 49. During the execution of the second icon change effect, it is decided at a rate of 100% whether or not to execute the second icon change effect.

In addition, in the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", When selecting the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. 49, the non-execution of the second icon change effect is set at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. decide. On the other hand, in the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21". , when selecting the scenario pattern 7 or the scenario pattern 8, the second icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22". , when selecting the scenario pattern 5 or the scenario pattern 6, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", When selecting the said scenario pattern 3 or the said scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23". , when selecting the scenario pattern 7 or the scenario pattern 8, the second icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the second icon change production selection process (S4508), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24". , when selecting the scenario pattern 5 or the scenario pattern 6, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. Note that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the execution lottery table for the second icon change effect shown in FIG. 49 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, a table showing the execution probability of the third icon change effect shown in FIG. 50 will be explained. In the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01", and the scenario When selecting pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined in percentage. In the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02", and the scenario When selecting pattern 2 or the scenario pattern 3, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined in percentage. In the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03", and the scenario When selecting pattern 1 or the scenario pattern 2, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined in percentage. In the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04", and the scenario When selecting pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined in percentage. In the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05", and the scenario When selecting pattern 2 or the scenario pattern 3, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined in percentage. In the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P06", "P07", or "P08". Regardless of which special figure 1 variation pattern, when selecting the scenario pattern 1, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern is selected based on the table shown in FIG. 50. During the execution of the third icon change effect, it is decided at a rate of 100% whether or not to execute the third icon change effect.

In addition, in the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", When selecting scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. decide. On the other hand, in the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21". , when selecting the scenario pattern 7 or the scenario pattern 8, the third icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22". , when selecting the scenario pattern 5 or the scenario pattern 6, the third icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23". , when selecting the scenario pattern 7 or the scenario pattern 8, the third icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the third icon change production selection process (S4509), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24". , when selecting the scenario pattern 5 or the scenario pattern 6, the third icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

Next, the execution timing of the second icon change effect and the execution timing of the third icon change effect in the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern will be explained using FIG. In addition, FIG. 51 shows the execution timing of the second icon change effect and the third icon change effect in the special figure variation effect based on any of the special figure 1 variation patterns among the special figure 1 variation patterns "P21" to "P24". This shows the execution timing.

As shown in FIG. 51, execution of the special figure variation effect is started, and first, execution of the second icon change effect is started. By executing the second icon change effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode. be changed. Then, the execution of the second icon change effect in the special figure change effect ends. Thereafter, during execution of the special figure variation effect, when a reach is established and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since execution of the N reach is started, a third icon change effect is executed. Note that the lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) from the start of execution of N reach corresponds to the "specific condition" of the present invention. By executing the third icon change effect, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode changes from the icon TA7 in the second expectation level display mode. The icon is changed to TA3 or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode. Then, the execution of the third icon change effect in the special figure change effect ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51, after the N reach is completed in the special symbol variation performance, the SP reach is developed through the development performance. After that, after the SP Reach ends with the special figure variation performance, the SP Reach (Battle Reach, Cooperative Reach) will proceed through the branch performance. As a result, the player can select one of the battle reach or cooperation reach by using the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode displayed on the display section 50a in the special figure variation effect. , make them understand that they will proceed to any SPSP reach. Then, by using the icon TA3 in the changed second expectation display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode, the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination will be a jackpot is grasped, and SPSP reach (battle reach, This makes it possible to enjoy joint fighting reach.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, an explanation will be given of an example of the effect when the second icon change effect and the third icon change effect are executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect. In addition, FIG. 52(B) to FIG. 54 show the second icon change effect and the third icon change effect in the special figure variation effect based on any of the special figure 1 variation patterns among the special figure 1 variation patterns "P21" to "P24". This is an example of a presentation when an icon change presentation is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 52, an example of the effect will be described when the second icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect.

When the normal production mode is set and the execution of the special symbol variation production is completed, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 will be displayed in a stop mode (“ At the same time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stop mode that suggests a loss ("5.4.3"). Moreover, as shown in FIG. 52(A), when the execution of the special figure variation effect is completed, the icon TA disappears from the icon display area 50e. As shown in FIG. 52(A), in the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d, the pending icon in the change suggestion display mode is composed of a text image of "in preparation" and a white triangular effect image. HA5 is displayed. By displaying the pending icon HA5 in the change suggestion display mode in the first display area 50d1, the player can see that the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon in the development suggestion display mode in the next special figure variation performance. This makes it possible to make students understand what is going on. Since the reservation icon HA5 in the change suggestion display mode is displayed in the first display area 50d1, the player is informed that the special figure 1 reservation number is "1".

When the special figure variation effect is executed by starting the variable display of the special figure 1, the pending icon HA5 of the change suggestion display mode displayed in the first display area 50d1 changes from the first display area 50d1 to the corresponding icon display. It moves (shifts) to the area 50e and becomes the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode (see FIG. 52(B)). By displaying the icon TA in this manner, the player can understand that the variable display of the next special figure 1 has started. In addition, by displaying the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode in the icon display area 50e, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode can be displayed as a battle development suggestion display while the player is performing the special figure variation effect. It is possible to make the user understand that the mode is changed to the icon TA6, or the icon TA7, the display mode suggesting cooperation development.

Furthermore, when the execution of the special symbol variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started. .

Thereafter, when the execution timing of the second icon change effect is reached during the execution of the special figure variation effect (see FIG. 51), the execution of the second icon change effect is started. When the second icon change effect is executed, the first icon change trigger image HE1 is displayed so as to cover the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e with a cloud. By displaying the first icon change trigger image HE1 in the icon display area 50e, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode becomes the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode. This makes it possible to understand that changes are being made.

For example, when the display of the first icon change trigger image HE1 is finished, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, and When the execution of the two-icon change effect is completed, the process proceeds from the effect example shown in FIG. 52(C) to the effect example shown in FIG. 53(A).

When the display of the first icon change trigger image HE1 displayed on the display section 50a ends, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode. be changed. When the execution of the second icon change effect is completed, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e of the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 53(A). By displaying the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode on the display section 50a, it becomes possible for the player to understand that the special figure variation performance will develop into a battle reach.

During the execution of the special figure variation performance, the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 are temporarily stopped in the same stopping manner (so-called reach eye), the reach is established, and the execution of the N reach is started. When the execution of N reach is started and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 5, ↓, 5"), and the third icon change effect is executed while the N reach is being executed. When the third icon change effect is executed, lightning is directed toward the first cloud effect image that covers the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e and the first cloud effect image. A second icon change trigger image HE2 composed of a falling second cloud effect image is displayed. In the third icon change production, when the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 ends, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon in the second expectation level display mode. The icon is changed to TA3 or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode, and the execution of the third icon change effect ends.

When the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 displayed on the display section 50a ends, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the corresponding icon TA6 in the second expectation level display mode. When the icon is changed to TA3 and the execution of the third icon change effect ends, the process proceeds to the example effect shown in FIG. 53(C). As shown in FIG. 53(C), the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. By displaying the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode on the display section 50a, it is possible to create a certain level of expectation that the player will win the jackpot.

On the other hand, the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 displayed on the display section 50a is finished, and the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is changed to the third expectation level display. When the mode is changed to the icon TA4 and the execution of the third icon change effect ends, the process proceeds to the example effect shown in FIG. 53(D). As shown in FIG. 53(D), the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. By displaying the icon TA7 in the third expectation level display mode on the display section 50a, it becomes possible to have great expectations that the result of the jackpot determination will be a jackpot.

Next, for example, when the display of the first icon change trigger image HE1 is finished, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is changed to the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode. When the second icon change effect ends, the process proceeds from the effect example shown in FIG. 52(C) to the effect example shown in FIG. 54(A).

After the display of the first icon change trigger image HE1 displayed on the display unit 50a ends, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode. , and the execution of the second icon change effect is completed. Subsequently, the execution of the second icon change effect is completed, and as shown in FIG. 54(A), the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e of the display section 50a. By displaying the icon TA7 in the cooperative play development suggestion display mode on the display section 50a, it becomes possible for the player to understand that the special symbol variation performance will develop into a cooperative play reach.

During the execution of the special figure variation performance, the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 temporarily stop in the same stopping manner (so-called reach eye), a reach is established, and the execution of N reach is started. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the N reach, as shown in FIG. 5, ↓, 5") and is in the ready-to-reach state, the third icon change effect is executed. When the third icon change effect is executed, the icon TA7, which is displayed in the icon display area 50e and is in the display mode suggesting cooperation development, is covered with a cloud, and a cloud is displayed that is dropping lightning toward the cloud. A second icon change trigger image HE2 is displayed. In the third icon change production, when the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 ends, the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon in the second expectation level display mode. The icon will be changed to TA3 or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode.

Upon completion of the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 displayed on the display section 50a, the icon TA7 in the cooperative development suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon in the second expectation level display mode. When the change is made to TA3 and the execution of the third icon change effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example effect shown in FIG. 54(C). As shown in FIG. 54(C), the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. By displaying the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode on the display section 50a, it is possible to create a certain level of expectation that the player will win the jackpot.

On the other hand, with the end of the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 displayed on the display section 50a, the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the third expectation level display mode. When the icon TA4 is changed to the icon TA4 and the execution of the third icon change effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example effect shown in FIG. 54(D). As shown in FIG. 54(D), the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. By displaying the icon TA7 in the third expectation level display mode on the display section 50a, it becomes possible to have great expectations that the result of the jackpot determination will be a jackpot.

Next, the production flow of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern in the non-time saving state in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be explained using FIG. 55. When the special symbol variation performance based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern is started in a non-time saving state, first, as shown in FIG. 55, the process branches to "normal loss variation" or "reach→N reach". In the case of "normal loss fluctuation", when the execution of the special symbol fluctuation performance is completed, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called randomness) that suggests a loss. In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P07" or "P08" has been executed (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the case of "reach → N reach", the process branches to "when it ends with N reach" or "development effect → L reach or SP reach" after passing through N reach.

In the case of "ending with N reach", when the execution of the special symbol fluctuation effect is completed, or the stop display is displayed in a stop mode that suggests a jackpot (so-called double hit), or a stop mode that suggests a reach loss (so-called reach lose eye) is displayed. ), the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03" or "P06" has been executed (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the case of "Development effect → L reach or SP reach" after N reach, it branches to "development effect → L reach or SP reach" or "branch effect" after SP reach. do.

In the case of "development effect → ending with L reach", when the development effect → L reach ends and the execution of the special symbol variation effect ends, the game will be stopped in a stop mode (so-called double eye) that suggests a jackpot, or Alternatively, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode that suggests a loss in the reach (so-called a loss in the reach). In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02" or "P05" has been executed (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the case of "development effect → ending with SP reach", when the development effect → SP reach ends and the execution of the special symbol fluctuation effect ends, the display stops in a stop mode (so-called double eye) that suggests a jackpot. Or, the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode that suggests a loss in the reach (so-called a loss in the reach). In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01" or "P04" has been executed (see FIG. 28). In addition, in the case of "branching performance" after SP reach, the process branches to "battle reach" or "cooperative reach".

During the execution of the branching effect, a preliminary suggestion cut-in effect, which is a type of preview effect indicating that the SPSP reach will proceed, is executed prior to the execution of the development suggestion effect (expectation suggestion effect) to be described later. The advance suggestion cut-in production includes a battle advance suggestion cut-in production that suggests proceeding to battle reach while a branching production is being executed, and a pre-battle suggestion cut-in production that suggests proceeding to cooperative reach during a branching production. There is.

In the case of "branching performance → battle reach", a pre-battle suggestion cut-in performance (pre-transition suggestion performance) that suggests proceeding to battle reach is executed in advance of execution of the development suggestion performance described later. Thereafter, during the execution of the branching effect after the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect has been executed, a battle development suggestion effect that suggests proceeding to battle reach is executed. After that, proceed to Battle Reach, and when the Battle Reach ends and the execution of the special pattern variation effect is finished, the display will stop in a stop mode that suggests a jackpot (so-called double eye), or a stop mode that suggests a loss in reach (so-called reach loss). The production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed at the eye). In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" or "P24" has been executed (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in the case of "branching effect → cooperative reach", during the execution of the branching effect, a cooperative advance suggestion cut-in effect that suggests proceeding to cooperative reach is executed before the execution of the development suggestion effect described later. Ru. Thereafter, during the execution of the branching effect after the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in effect has been executed, the cooperation development suggestion effect suggesting proceeding to the cooperation reach reach is executed. After that, proceed to the joint reach, and when the joint reach ends and the execution of the special symbol fluctuation effect is completed, the display will stop in a stop mode that suggests a jackpot (so-called double), or a stop mode that suggests a loss in the reach (so-called reach loss). The production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed at the eye). In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" or "P23" has been executed (see FIG. 28).

Here, control when the performance control microcomputer 121 executes SPSP reach will be explained. In the following, when the control is in the non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the special pattern 1 variation patterns "P21" to "P24" according to the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state shown in FIG. It is assumed that one of the special figure 1 fluctuation patterns has been determined.

When a variation start command including information on any one of the special figure 1 variation patterns "P21" to "P24" is sent to the production control microcomputer 121, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment In the sub variation pattern selection process (S4504) of the variation production start process (S4304), the microcomputer 121 selects one of the special figure 1 variation patterns from among the special figure 1 variation patterns "P21" to "P24" based on the information of the special figure 1 variation pattern. , determine the sub-variation pattern. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 randomly selects whether or not to execute SPSP reach (joint fight reach, battle reach), and when it is determined to execute SPSP reach (joint fight reach, battle reach), With reference to the SPSP reach sub-variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 56, a sub-variation pattern is determined using the sub-variation pattern random number.

For example, if the information included in the transmitted variation start command is a command including information on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", in the sub variation pattern selection process (S4504), the production control microcomputer 121 The sub fluctuation pattern Q1 is determined at the ratio of . In this case, when a variable effect start command including information on the sub-variable pattern Q1 is transmitted to the image control board 140, on the display unit 50a, after the SP reach, a branch effect is performed, and then a cooperative reach is executed. After passing through the winning/losing branch, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are finally stopped and displayed in a stopping manner (so-called double) that suggests a jackpot.

In addition, if the information included in the transmitted variation start command is a command including information on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", in the sub variation pattern selection process (S4504), the production control microcomputer 121 The sub fluctuation pattern Q2 is determined at the ratio of . In this case, when a variation effect start command including information on the sub variation pattern Q2 is transmitted to the image control board 140, on the display unit 50a, after the SP reach, a branch effect is performed, and then a battle reach is executed. After passing through the winning/losing branch, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are finally stopped and displayed in a stopping manner (so-called double) that suggests a jackpot.

If the information included in the transmitted variation start command is a command that includes information on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", in the sub variation pattern selection process (S4504), the production control microcomputer 121 selects a rate of 100%. Then, the sub fluctuation pattern Q3 is determined. In this case, when a variable effect start command including information on the sub-variable pattern Q3 is transmitted to the image control board 140, on the display unit 50a, after the SP reach, a branch effect is performed, and then a cooperative reach is executed. Then, after the winning/losing branch, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode that suggests a reach loss (so-called reach loss eye).

If the information included in the transmitted variation start command is a command that includes information on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", in the sub variation pattern selection process (S4504), the production control microcomputer 121 selects a rate of 100%. The sub fluctuation pattern Q4 is determined. In this case, when a variation performance start command including information on the sub variation pattern Q4 is transmitted to the image control board 140, on the display unit 50a, after SP reach, a branch performance is performed, and then battle reach is executed. Then, after the winning/losing branch, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode that suggests a reach loss (so-called reach loss eye).

Next, a table showing the execution probability of the pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect will be explained using FIG. 57(A). In the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines which special figure 1 among the special figure 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P08" the information included in the received variation start command Even if it is a variation pattern, based on the table shown in FIG. decide.

In addition, in the advance notice performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P21" when the information included in the received fluctuation start command is shown in FIG. ), it is determined at a rate of 100% whether or not to execute the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance during the execution of the special symbol variation performance based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern. In the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the process shown in FIG. Based on the table shown, the execution of the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special symbol variation performance based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern. In the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the process shown in FIG. Based on the table shown, non-execution of the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special symbol variation performance based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern. In the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the process shown in FIG. Based on the table shown, the execution of the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special symbol variation performance based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern. Note that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the execution lottery table for the pre-battle suggestion cut-in performance shown in FIG. 57(A) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57(B), a table showing the execution probability of the collaboration advance suggestion cut-in effect will be explained. In the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines whether the information included in the received variation start command is any special figure 1 among the special figure 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P08". Even if it is a variation pattern, based on the table shown in FIG. 57(B), the non-execution of the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in production is set at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special symbol variation production based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern. decide.

In addition, in the preview production selection process (S4510), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" as shown in FIG. 57 (B ), it is decided at a rate of 100% to execute the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in effect during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. In the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the process shown in FIG. Based on the table shown, it is determined at a rate of 100% whether or not to execute the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in effect during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. In the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the process shown in FIG. Based on the table shown, the execution of the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. In the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the process shown in FIG. Based on the table shown, it is determined at a rate of 100% whether or not to execute the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in effect during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. Note that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the execution lottery table for the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance shown in FIG. 57(B) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, a development suggestion effect, which is a type of advance notice effect showing the development of SPSP reach, which is executed after the advance suggestion cut-in effect is executed during execution of the branch effect, will be explained. The development suggestion production includes a battle development suggestion production (low expectation suggestion production) that shows the development to a battle reach, which is a type of SPSP reach, and a cooperation development suggestion production, which shows the development to a cooperative reach, which is a type of SPSP reach. (high expectations suggestive performance). Further, during execution of the branching effect, a super hot suggestion effect is executed in place of the development suggestion effect indicating the development of SPSP reach, which is executed after the preliminary suggestion cut-in effect is executed. Here, the super hot performance (specific performance) is a type of preview performance that suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot is much higher than that of the battle development suggestion performance and the cooperation development suggestion production.

First, using FIG. 58(A), a table showing the execution probability of the development suggestion effect during the execution of the special figure variation effect will be explained. In the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines which special figure 1 among the special figure 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P08" the information included in the received variation start command Even in the case of a variation pattern, based on the table shown in FIG. 58, non-execution of the development suggestion production is determined at a rate of 100% during execution of the special symbol variation production based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern.

In addition, in the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the process shown in FIG. Based on the table shown, during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, execution of the cooperation development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 92%, and non-execution of the cooperation development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 8%. decide.

In addition, in the advance notice production selection process (S4510), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the variation pattern shown in FIG. Based on the table shown, during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, execution of the battle development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 91%, and non-execution of the battle development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 9%. decide.

In addition, in the advance notice production selection process (S4510), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the variation pattern shown in FIG. Based on the table shown, during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, the execution of the cooperation development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 98%, and the execution of the cooperation development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 2%. do.

In addition, in the advance notice production selection process (S4510), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment selects the variation pattern shown in FIG. Based on the table shown, the execution of the battle development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 99% during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, and the execution of the battle development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 1%. do. Note that the distribution rate (selection rate) of the execution lottery table for the development suggestion performance shown in FIG. 58(A) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Subsequently, in the preview performance selection process (S4510), the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the development suggestion performance will not be executed based on the development suggestion performance execution lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the execution lottery table for the super hot suggesting performance shown in (B), the execution of the super hot suggesting performance is determined.

In the preview production selection process (S4510), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", and the development shown in FIG. 58(A) If it is decided not to execute the collaboration development suggestion performance based on the execution lottery table for the suggestion performance, the execution of the super hot suggestion performance is decided based on the execution lottery table for the super hot suggestion performance shown in FIG. 58(B). Determine at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the preview production selection process (S4510), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", and that If it is decided not to execute the collaboration development suggestion performance based on the development suggestion performance execution lottery table shown in FIG. Decide on execution at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the preview production selection process (S4510), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", and that If it is determined that the battle development suggestion performance is not executed based on the execution lottery table for the development suggestion performance shown in FIG. Decide on execution at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the preview production selection process (S4510), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", and that If it is determined that the battle development suggestion performance is not executed based on the execution lottery table for the development suggestion performance shown in FIG. Determine execution at a rate of 100%. It should be noted that the allocation ratio (selection ratio) of the execution lottery of the super hot suggestion performance shown in FIG. 58(B) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In the explanation of the execution lottery table for the development suggestion performance shown in FIG. 58(A) above, and in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot. It is easier for the development suggestion effect to be executed during execution of the branch effect than in the case where the development suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, from the explanation of the execution lottery table for the super hot suggestion performance shown in FIG. It is easier to perform the intense suggestion performance during execution of the branch performance than when the result is a loss. As a result, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, if the super hot suggestion performance is executed during the execution of the branch performance, there is a very high possibility that the result of the jackpot determination will be a jackpot.

Next, the SPSP Reach jackpot expectation level will be explained using FIG. 59. In addition, the jackpot expectation level shown in FIG. 59 is determined by the performance control microcomputer 121 with the distribution rate of the special symbol 1 variation pattern selected in the case of "non-time saving state" and "jackpot" shown in FIG. 29(A). (See FIG. 29(B)), the distribution rate of the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern selected in the case of "non-time saving state" and "loss with reach" (see FIG. 29(B)), and FIG. 58(A) Each jackpot expectation level shown in FIG. 59 is set based on the execution lottery table for the development suggestion performance shown in FIG. 58(B) and the execution lottery table for the extremely hot suggestion performance shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the jackpot expectation level is , is set at approximately 62%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the expectation of a jackpot when a battle reach is executed after a branching effect in which a pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect and a super hot suggestion effect are executed. The degree is set at approximately 93%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the expectation of a jackpot when a cooperative reach is executed through a branching effect in which a cooperative play advance suggestion cut-in presentation and a cooperative play development suggestion presentation are executed. The degree is set to about 79%. As shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the jackpot expectation level is , is set to approximately 94%.

From the explanation using the table showing the expected jackpot of SPSP reach shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when proceeding to battle reach in the special figure variation effect, a pre-battle suggestion cut is made in the branch effect. When in-effects and battle development suggestion effects are executed (approximately 62%) ⇒ When proceeding to cooperative reach in the special map fluctuation effect, when the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in effect and cooperation development suggestion effect are executed in the branching effect (Approx. 79%) ⇒ When proceeding to the battle reach with the special figure variation effect, the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect and super hot suggestion effect are executed in the branching effect (about 93%) ⇒ In the special figure variation effect When proceeding to the joint battle reach, the expectation level of jackpot increases in the order in which the joint battle advance suggestion cut-in performance and the super hot suggestion performance are executed in the branching performance (approximately 94%). As a result, in the first embodiment, regardless of whether the player advances to SPSP reach of battle reach or cooperative reach, if the super hot suggestion performance is executed in the branch performance, the player will win a jackpot. It is possible to enjoy the special symbol fluctuation performance with some peace of mind by letting the user understand that the possibility of the judgment result being a jackpot is very high.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when proceeding to the battle reach in the special figure fluctuation effect, the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect and the super hot suggestion effect are executed in the branch effect (approximately 93%, see FIG. 59). , when proceeding to the joint battle reach in the special figure fluctuation performance, the jackpot expectation level is substantial when the joint battle advance suggestion cut-in performance and the super hot suggestion performance are executed in the branch performance (approximately 94%, see Figure 59) It can be said that they are the same. Here, the fact that the jackpot expectations are substantially the same means that each jackpot expectation when proceeding to either SPSP reach, battle reach or cooperative reach, when a super hot suggestion performance is executed at the time of production branching. It means that it is included in the range of 10% before and after. However, if a super hot suggestion performance is executed at the point of branching during a branching performance, the expectation level of each jackpot when proceeding to either SPSP reach, battle reach or cooperative reach, is within a few percent range. It is preferable that there be. As a result, when proceeding to the battle reach in the special figure variation production, the battle pre-suggestion cut-in production and super hot suggestion production are executed in the branch production (approximately 93%, see Figure 59), or the special picture variation When proceeding to a joint battle reach in the production, when the joint battle preliminary suggestion cut-in production and the super hot suggestion production are executed in the branch production (approximately 94%, see Figure 59), the jackpot expectation level is virtually the same. It becomes possible to make people feel that they are.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the execution timing of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in performance and the execution timing of the battle development suggestion performance in the branch performance will be explained. When the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" or "P24" is executed, as shown in FIG. 60, execution of the branch effect is started in the special figure variation effect. Then, at the end of the branching performance, execution of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in performance is started. At the same time as the execution of the battle advance suggestion cut-in production ends, the execution of the battle development suggestion production starts. Thereafter, at the same time as the execution of the battle development suggestion performance ends in the branch performance, the execution of the branch performance also ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the execution timing of the pre-battle suggestion cut-in presentation and the execution timing of the extremely hot suggestion presentation in the branch presentation will be explained. It should be noted that the super hot suggestion performance shown in FIG. 61 is executed instead of the battle development suggestion performance during execution of the branch performance. When the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" or "P24" is executed, as shown in FIG. 61, execution of the branch effect is started in the special figure variation effect. Then, at the end of the branching performance, execution of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in performance is started. At the same time as the execution of the pre-battle suggestion cut-in production ends, the execution of the super hot suggestion production begins. Thereafter, at the same time as the execution of the super hot suggestion performance ends in the branch performance, the execution of the branch performance also ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the execution timing of the collaboration advance suggestion cut-in performance and the execution timing of the collaboration development suggestion performance in the branch performance will be explained. When the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" or "P23" is executed, as shown in FIG. 62, execution of the branch effect is started in the special figure variation effect. Then, at the end of the branching performance, execution of a cut-in performance suggesting advance cooperation is started. At the same time as the execution of the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance ends, the execution of the cooperation development development suggestion performance is started. Thereafter, at the same time as the execution of the collaboration development suggestion performance ends in the branch performance, the execution of the branch performance also ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the execution timing of the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in presentation and the execution timing of the super hot suggestion presentation in the branch presentation will be explained. It should be noted that the super hot suggestion performance shown in FIG. 63 is executed instead of the collaboration development suggestion performance during execution of the branch performance. When the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" or "P23" is executed, as shown in FIG. 63, execution of the branch effect is started in the special figure variation effect. Then, at the end of the branching performance, execution of a cut-in performance suggesting advance cooperation is started. At the same time as the execution of the collaboration advance suggestion cut-in production ends, the execution of the super hot suggestion production begins. Thereafter, at the same time as the execution of the super hot suggestion performance ends in the branch performance, the execution of the branch performance also ends.

According to the explanation using FIGS. 60 to 63 above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the advance suggestion cut-in performance is executed at the end of the branch performance, so that the player can receive the special figure variation performance. It is possible to know in advance whether the SPSP reach will develop into a battle reach or a collaborative reach. Then, at the same time as the execution of the preliminary suggestion cut-in performance ends, either the development suggestion performance or the super hot suggestion performance is executed. As a result, for players who have learned that the special figure variation effect will develop into a battle reach instead of a cooperative reach, they can immediately determine a jackpot by executing the super hot suggestion effect at the same time as the advance suggestion cut-in effect ends. It is possible to set expectations on the possibility that the result will be a jackpot. On the other hand, for players who have learned that the special figure variation effect will develop into a joint fight reach instead of a battle reach, they will be able to determine the jackpot by executing the super hot suggestion effect at the same time as the advance suggestion cut-in effect ends. It is possible to give peace of mind by raising expectations with the possibility that the result will be a jackpot.

Next, using FIG. 64 to FIG. 66, if the branching effect is executed when the branching effect is reached at the point where the effect branches to either SPSP reach in the special figure variation effect, battle reach or cooperative reach. An example of the production will be explained. In addition, FIG. 64 to FIG. 66 are production examples of a branch performance executed in a special pattern variation production based on any one of the special pattern 1 variation patterns “P21” to “P24”. First, in the production example shown in FIG. 64, during execution of a branching production, a battle advance suggestion cut-in production or a cooperation advance suggestion cut-in production is executed, and a battle development suggestion production or a cooperation development suggestion production is executed. This is an example of a performance when

While the special figure fluctuation effect is being executed, an SP reach-only effect (for example, a battle effect) is being performed (see FIG. 64(A)). After that, when the performance branching point of branching to either SPSP reach out of battle reach or cooperative reach is reached, execution of the branch performance is started. When the branching effect is started in the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a background image showing the line of sight between the horse and the main character, and a text image showing "Battle or cooperation?" A branching effect image BA composed of is displayed on the display section 50a. Thereafter, the process branches from the performance example shown in FIG. 64(B) to the performance example shown in FIG. 64(C-1) and the performance example shown in FIG. 64(C-2).

For example, if a special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" or "P24" is being executed, the effect example shown in FIG. 64(B) changes from the effect example shown in FIG. 64(C-1). move on. During execution of the branching effect, if the process proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 64 (C-1), a pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect is executed. When the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 64 (C-1), a battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 showing a state in which a confrontation between a horse and the main character will take place is displayed on the display section 50a. is displayed. When the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 is displayed on the display unit 50a, before the development suggestion effect is executed, the player is prompted to select one of the battle reach or cooperative reach after the execution of the branch effect is completed. , it is possible for the player to understand that the battle reach will develop into a battle reach with lower expectations for a jackpot than the cooperative reach.

In the branch performance, when the display of the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance image ZK1 on the display section 50a ends, the execution of the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance ends. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 64 (D-1), a battle development suggestion effect is executed in which a battle development suggestion character image IS1 of "Battle" is displayed on the display unit 50a during execution of the branch effect. By displaying the battle development suggestion character image IS1 on the display unit 50a, after the execution of the branch effect is finished, the player is directed to the battle reach or the cooperative reach, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the cooperative reach. This makes it possible to better understand the development of the system. Thereafter, when the execution of the branch effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example effect shown in FIG. 67(A).

For example, if a special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" or "P23" is being executed, the effect example shown in FIG. 64(B) changes from the effect example shown in FIG. 64(C-2). I will move on. During execution of the branching effect, if the process proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 64 (C-2), a cut-in effect suggesting cooperation in advance is executed. When the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 64 (C-2), the display section 50a displays a cooperation advance suggestion cut-in effect image ZK2 showing a state in which the horse and the main character hit it off. Is displayed. When the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in effect image ZK2 is displayed on the display unit 50a, before the development suggestion effect is executed, the player is prompted to select one of the battle reach or cooperation reach after the execution of the branch effect is completed. It is possible for the player to understand that this will develop into a cooperative reach that has higher expectations for a jackpot than a battle reach.

In the branch performance, when the display of the collaboration advance suggestion cut-in performance image ZK2 ends on the display unit 50a, the execution of the collaboration advance suggestion cut-in performance ends. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 64 (D-2), a cooperation development suggestion performance is executed in which a cooperation development suggestion character image IS2 of "cooperative struggle" is displayed on the display unit 50a during execution of the branch performance. By displaying the character image IS2 suggesting the development of cooperation of "Cooperative Struggle" on the display unit 50a, after the execution of the branching effect is finished, the player will be informed that among the Battle Reach or Cooperation Reach, the jackpot expectation level is higher than that of Battle Reach. It is possible for the player to understand that the joint play will develop into a high reach. Thereafter, when the execution of the branch effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example effect shown in FIG. 68(A).

Next, an example of a production in the case where a super hot suggestion production is executed instead of a battle development suggestion production during execution of a branch production in a special pattern variation production based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" or "P24" will be explained using FIG. 65.

While the special figure variation effect is being executed, an SP reach-only effect (for example, a battle effect) is being performed (see FIG. 65(A)). After that, when the performance branching point of branching to either SPSP reach out of battle reach or cooperative reach is reached, execution of the branch performance is started. When a branching effect is started in the special figure variation effect, a branching effect image BA is displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 65(B).

Then, when the super hot suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the branch effect in the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" or "P24", the effect shown in FIG. 65(B) The example will proceed to the production example shown in FIG. 65(C). During execution of the branching effect, if the process proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 65(C), a battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect is executed. When the pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the display section 50a displays a pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 showing a state in which a confrontation between the horse and the main character will take place. be done. When the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 is displayed on the display unit 50a, before the development suggestion effect is executed, the player is prompted to select one of the battle reach or cooperative reach after the execution of the branch effect is completed. , it is possible for the player to understand that the battle reach will develop into a battle reach with lower expectations for a jackpot than the cooperative reach.

In the branch performance, when the display of the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance image ZK1 on the display section 50a ends, the execution of the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance ends. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 65(D), in place of the battle development suggestion effect in which the battle development suggestion character image IS1 is displayed during the execution of the branch effect, a super hot suggestion effect image GE indicating "super hot" is displayed. The super hot suggestion effect displayed in the section 50a is executed. By displaying the super hot suggestion performance image GE on the display section 50a, it becomes possible for the player to understand that there is a very high possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. In addition, after the pre-battle suggestion cut-in production image ZK1 is displayed on the display unit 50a, the super hot suggestion production image GE is displayed, so that the user knows that the battle reach will develop with lower jackpot expectations than the cooperative reach. Since the state is changed from not having expectations for a jackpot to being able to expect a jackpot, it becomes possible to enjoy the special pattern variation performance even more. Thereafter, when the execution of the branch effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example effect shown in FIG. 67(A).

Next, using FIG. 66, we will discuss an example of a production when a super hot suggestion production is executed during execution of a branch production in a special pattern variation production based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" or "P23". explain.

While the special figure variation effect is being executed, an SP reach-only effect (for example, a battle effect) is being performed (see FIG. 66(A)). After that, when the performance branching point of branching to either SPSP reach out of battle reach or cooperative reach is reached, execution of the branch performance is started. When the branch effect in the special figure variation effect is started, the branch effect image BA is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 66(B).

When a super hot suggestion effect is executed during execution of a branching effect in a special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" or "P23", from the example of effect shown in FIG. 66(B) The process will proceed to the production example shown in FIG. 66(C). During execution of the branching effect, if the process proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 66(C), a cut-in effect suggesting cooperation in advance is executed. When the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance image ZK2 is displayed on the display unit 50a, showing a state in which the horse and the main character hit it off. Ru. When the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance image ZK2 is displayed on the display unit 50a, before the development suggestion performance is executed, the player is asked to select one of the battle reach or cooperation reach after the execution of the branch performance is completed. , it is possible for the player to understand that this will develop into a cooperative reach, which has higher expectations for a jackpot than a battle reach.

In the branch performance, when the display of the collaboration advance suggestion cut-in performance image ZK2 ends on the display unit 50a, the execution of the collaboration advance suggestion cut-in performance ends. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(D), instead of the cooperation development suggestion performance in which the cooperation development suggestion character image IS2 is displayed during the execution of the branching performance, a super hot suggestion performance image GE indicating "super hot" is displayed. The super hot suggestion effect displayed in the section 50a is executed. By displaying the super-hot suggestion performance image GE on the display section 50a, it becomes possible for the player to understand that there is a very high possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. In addition, after the collaboration pre-suggestion cut-in performance image ZK2 is displayed on the display unit 50a, the super hot suggestion performance image GE is displayed, so that the user knows that the collaboration reach has a higher jackpot expectation than the battle reach. From a state of high expectations for a jackpot, the expectation for a jackpot is further increased, and it becomes possible to enjoy the special pattern fluctuation performance with peace of mind. Thereafter, when the execution of the branch effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example effect shown in FIG. 68(A).

<Battle Reach>
Next, a specific example of battle reach will be described using FIG. 67. As shown in FIG. 67, in the battle reach, first, an image or the like indicating that the main character and the enemy character will fight from now on is displayed on the display unit 50a (see FIG. 67(A)). Then, an image showing the main character and the enemy character fighting and defending is displayed on the display unit 50a (not shown), and before the winning/losing branch, an image showing the main character attacking the enemy character is displayed. is displayed on the display section 50a (see FIG. 67(B)).

If it is a battle reach executed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", after the effect shown in Figure 67(B), the main character A victory image (including an image in which the main character is happy and a background image for success G80) showing that the main character has won against the enemy character is displayed on the display section 50a, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 indicate a jackpot win. The screen is temporarily stopped and displayed as "Zero" (see FIG. 67(C)). Then, the background image of the display section 50a returns to the daytime normal background image G102, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed as "Zero" (Fig. 67 (See (D)).

On the other hand, in the case of a battle reach executed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", after the effect shown in FIG. 67(B), the main character is A defeat image (including an image in which the main character is sad and a failure background image G81) indicating that the enemy character has been defeated by the counter is displayed on the display section 50a, and the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are lost. A temporary stop is displayed with a "reach miss" indicating that this is the case (see FIG. 67(E)). Then, the background image of the display section 50a returns to the daytime normal background image G102, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed as "reach miss" (Fig. 67 (See (F)).

<Joint Reach>
Next, a specific example of cooperative reach will be described using FIG. 68. In the collaborative reach, an image indicating that the protagonist character and the enemy character will fight from now on is displayed on the display unit 50a (not shown), and then, as shown in FIG. 68(A), an ally character of the protagonist character An image showing that the soldiers have appeared as reinforcements is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, an image indicating that an ally character (horse) of the main character character has appeared as a reinforcement in the joint reach is displayed on the display unit 50a. After that, an image in which the main character and allied characters cooperate in a battle against an enemy character is displayed on the display unit 50a (not shown), and further shows that the main character and allied characters together attack the enemy character. The image is displayed on the display section 50a (see FIG. 68(B)).

If it is a joint reach executed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", after the effect shown in FIG. 68(B), the main character A victory image (including an image in which the main character is happy and a background image for success G80) showing that the main character has won against the enemy character is displayed on the display section 50a, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 indicate a jackpot win. The display is temporarily stopped at "Zero" (see FIG. 68(C)). Then, the background image of the display section 50a returns to the daytime normal background image G102, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed as "Zero" (Fig. 68 (See (D)).

On the other hand, if it is a joint reach executed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", after the effect shown in Fig. 68 (B), the main character will be shown as a failure effect (loss effect) that suggests a loss. A defeat image (including an image in which the main character is sad and a failure background image G81) indicating that the enemy character has been defeated by the counter is displayed on the display section 50a, and the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are lost. A temporary stop is displayed with a "reach miss" indicating that this is the case (see FIG. 68(E)). Then, the background image of the display section 50a returns to the daytime normal background image G102, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed as "reach miss" (Fig. 68 (See (F)).

8. Control of performance by the performance control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment Next, control of the performance by the performance control microcomputer 121 of this embodiment (first embodiment) will be described based on FIGS. 69 to 71.

[1. Received command analysis processing]
First, the received command analysis process (S4105) of this embodiment will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 69, in the received command analysis process (S4105), the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether the production control microcomputer 121 has received a starting winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command) from the main control board 100. It is determined whether or not (S4301), and if it has been received, processing at the time of starting winning (S4302), which will be described later, is performed.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command or special figure 2 fluctuation start command) has been received from the main control board 100 (S4303), and determines whether or not it has been received. For example, a variable effect start process to be described later is performed (S4304).

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a special symbol variation stop command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4305), and if it has received it, performs variation production termination processing (S4306). In the variation production end process (S4306), the production control microcomputer 121 ends the special symbol variation production (stops the variable display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, and performs a stop display).

In the variation production end process (S4306), the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special symbol variation stop command, and based on the analysis result, appropriately ends the special symbol variation production (production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols). A special symbol variation production end command for stopping the variation display of KZ1 to KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation production end command, it ends the special symbol variation production that is being executed (stops the variation production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4307), and if so, performs opening production selection processing (S4308). In the opening performance selection process (S4308), the opening command is analyzed and, based on the analysis result, a pattern (content) of the opening performance to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an opening performance start command for starting an opening performance using the selected opening performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a round game command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4309), and if so, performs a round performance selection process (S4310). In the round performance selection process (S4310), the round game command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (content) of the round performance to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected. Then, a round performance start command for starting a round performance using the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4311), and if so, performs an ending effect selection process (S4312). In the ending effect selection process (S4312), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and selects the pattern (content) of the jackpot ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game based on the analysis result. Then, a jackpot ending effect start command for starting an ending effect using the selected jackpot ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 performs other processing (S4313) based on received commands other than the above-mentioned commands (for example, processing for performing production accompanying the fluctuating display of normal symbols, etc.). Then, the received command analysis process (S4105) ends.

[2. Start-up winning process]
First, in the start-up winning process (S4302) of the first embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 70, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores the start-up winning command pending storage section of the performance RAM 124 (S4401). Specifically, if the received command is the first starting winning command, it is stored in the first starting winning command pending storage section, and if the received command is the second starting winning command, it is stored in the second starting winning command pending storage section. to be memorized. The starting winning command is stored in the smallest numbered storage area in which the command is not stored among the first to fourth storage areas in each starting winning command pending storage section. Thereby, the start winning commands are stored in the order corresponding to the storage order of the special figure reservation.

After step S4401, if the starting winning command stored in step S4401 is the first starting winning command, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the value of the first special symbol pending production counter provided in the production RAM 124 to "1". If it is a second starting winning command, the value of the second special symbol pending performance counter provided in the performance RAM 124 is updated by adding "1" (S4402). Note that the first special figure reservation performance counter is a counter on the performance control side (sub control board 120 side) that calculates the number of first special figure reservations. Similarly, the second special figure reservation performance counter is a counter on the performance control side that calculates the number of second special figure reservations.

After step S4402, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a look-ahead determination including the propriety of the jackpot based on the start winning command stored in step S4403 and the table shown in FIG. 30 (S4403). In the look-ahead determination, in addition to determining whether or not there is a jackpot, the length of the fluctuation time and whether or not there is a reach are determined.

After step S4403, in step S4404, the production control microcomputer 121, based on the result of the pre-read determination in step S4403, the information included in the start winning command stored in step S4401, and the table shown in FIG. A prefetch scenario pattern is selected using a prefetch scenario pattern selection random number from "0" to "99" (see FIG. 33). Note that the data of the prefetch scenario pattern selected by the production control microcomputer 121 is stored in the prefetch scenario pattern storage section of the production RAM 124.

Subsequently, in step S4404, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays a hold icon HA corresponding to the selected prefetch scenario pattern on the display unit 50a (S4405), and proceeds to step S4406.

Subsequently, in step S4406, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether to execute another prefetch performance. If the production control microcomputer 121 determines to execute another pre-read production (YES in S4406), it decides to execute another pre-read production indicating the jackpot expectation level (S4407), and sends the pre-read start command to the production RAM 124. is set in the output buffer of (S4408). Other pre-read effects include a pending icon change effect that changes the display mode of the pending icon HA, a continuous preview effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols, and the like.

When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out and a pre-read effect using the image is performed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the image control board 140 is performing a prefetch effect using images, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls audio according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. Sound is outputted from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (executing a pre-reading effect using audio), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the lamp control circuit 151 (performing a pre-reading effect using light emission). It is possible to operate the body 55k and the under-panel movable body 56k (execute a pre-reading effect by operation).

[3. Variable performance start processing]
As shown in FIG. 71, in the variation production start process (S4304) of the first embodiment, the production control microcomputer 121 first analyzes the variation start command (S4501). The variation start command includes information on variation patterns (FIGS. 11, 12, and 28) and information on special pattern stop symbol data based on jackpot determination and the like.

Subsequently, if the information included in the variation start command analyzed in step S4501 is the special figure 1 variation start command, the production control microcomputer 121 subtracts "1" from the value of the first special figure pending production counter, and starts the special figure. If it is a 2 fluctuation start command, "1" is subtracted from the value of the 2nd special figure pending production counter. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 shifts the data stored in the starting winning command pending storage section (first starting winning command pending storage section, second starting winning command pending storage section) (S4502). Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 shifts the hold icon HA (S4503).

Subsequently, in step S4504, the production control microcomputer 121 selects the scenario pattern selection from "0" to "99" based on the information included in the variation start command analyzed in step S4501 and the table shown in FIG. A random number is used to select the scenario pattern of the icon TA. The data of the scenario pattern selected by the performance control microcomputer 121 is stored in the scenario pattern storage section of the performance RAM 124.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects the performance pattern EZ to be finally stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation performance (S4505). Specifically, in addition to obtaining a random number for determining the production design, one table is selected based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command from among multiple tables classified according to the presence or absence of reach, and the selection is performed. Using the created table, a performance symbol is selected by determining the acquired random number for determining a performance symbol. As a result, the combination of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 (for example, "7, 7, 7", etc.) to be finally stopped and displayed is determined. In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 also selects the small symbol KZ to be finally stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation production in the variation production start process (S4304). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires a random number for determining a small symbol, selects one table based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command, and uses the selected table to create the acquired small symbol. A small symbol is selected by determining a random number for symbol determination. As a result, the combination of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 (for example, "7, 7, 7", etc.) to be finally stopped and displayed is determined.

Subsequently, in the sub-variation pattern selection process (S4506), the production control microcomputer 121 associates the production contents of the special figure variation production based on the set production mode and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command. A sub-fluctuation pattern determination table is selected for performing sub-fluctuation pattern determination for determining the sub-fluctuation pattern that has been determined. A plurality of sub variation pattern determination tables are provided in association with production modes and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one sub variation pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each sub-fluctuation pattern determination table, the value of the random number for sub-fluctuation pattern determination (sub-fluctuation pattern determination value) is distributed to one or more sub-fluctuation patterns so as to achieve a predetermined distribution rate (%). . Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 obtains the value indicated by the sub-variation pattern determination random number counter as a sub-variation pattern determination random number, and performs sub-variation pattern determination based on the obtained sub-variation pattern determination random number. Note that the random number for determining the sub-variation pattern takes a value in the range from "0" to "99".

In the sub-variation pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the obtained sub-variation pattern determination random number with the selected sub-variation pattern table, determines the sub-variation pattern, and inputs data representing the determined sub-variation pattern. Set it in the performance RAM 124. Once the special symbol variation production pattern is decided, the time of the variation production, the variation display mode of the production symbol, the presence or absence of the reach production, the content of the reach production, the presence or absence of the operation production, the content of the operation production, production development configuration, and the background of the production pattern. The details of the special figure variation production, including the type of etc., will be determined.

In the sub-fluctuation pattern selection process (S4506), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, for example, determines that the set production mode is the normal production mode and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is If it is any of the special figure 1 variation patterns "P21" to "P24", the sub variation patterns "Q1" to "Q4" are selected based on the selected sub variation pattern selection table for SPSP reach shown in FIG. '', one of the sub-variation patterns is determined, and data representing the determined sub-variation pattern is set in the performance RAM 124.

Subsequently, in the first icon change performance selection process (S4507), the performance control microcomputer 121 selects the first icon change performance based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command and the first icon change performance execution lottery table shown in FIG. , the first icon change performance execution lottery number is used to determine whether or not to execute the first icon change performance. In the first icon change performance selection process (S4508), if the performance control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the first icon change performance, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects the first icon change performance based on the performance mode selection table for the first icon change performance shown in FIG. , the first presentation mode of the first icon change presentation or the second presentation mode of the first icon change presentation is selected as the presentation mode of the first icon change presentation using the first icon change presentation presentation mode lottery random number. . As a result, when the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is selected, the contents of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode (execution timing of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode and the first effect mode) The execution timing of the movable body performance and the display timing of the first board movable body image KG1 (see FIG. 40), the display of the first change trigger image IH1, the display of the first board movable body image KG1, and the first performance mode. execution of the movable body effect) is determined. In addition, when the first icon change performance of the second performance mode is selected, the content of the first icon change performance of the second performance mode (the execution timing of the first icon change performance of the second performance mode and the content of the first icon change performance of the second performance mode) Execution timing of movable body performance and display timing of second board movable body image KG2 (see FIG. 41), display of second change trigger image IH2, display of second board movable body image KG2, movement of second performance mode (execution of physical performance, etc.) is determined.

Subsequently, in the second icon change performance selection process (S4508), the performance control microcomputer 121 selects the second icon change performance based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command and the second icon change performance execution lottery table shown in FIG. , a random number for second icon change performance execution lottery from "0" to "99" is used to determine whether or not to execute the second icon change performance. As a result, the contents of the second icon change effect (execution timing of the second icon change effect (see FIG. 51), display of the first icon change trigger image HE1, etc.) are determined.

Subsequently, in the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the third icon change effect based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command and the third icon change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. , a third icon change performance execution lottery random number of "0" to "99" is used to determine whether or not to execute the third icon change performance. As a result, the contents of the third icon change effect (execution timing of the third icon change effect (see FIG. 51), display of the second icon change trigger image HE2, etc.) are determined.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects a preview performance (S4510). Specifically, in addition to obtaining a random number for determining the preview performance, one table is selected based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command from among multiple tables classified according to the presence or absence of reach, and the selection The preview performance is selected by determining the obtained random number for determining the preview performance using the table obtained. As a result, the contents of the preview performances, such as so-called step-up preview performances and chance-up preview performances, are determined.

Examples of preview effects include a line preview with a golden frame that indicates high expectations for winning a jackpot (jackpot expectation), a line preview with a green frame that indicates medium jackpot expectation, and a jackpot. An example of this is a preview of lines in a blue frame that indicates that expectations are lower than these. In other words, the preview performance is a performance that shows the player's expectation of winning before the final notification of winning or loss is made using the performance pattern EZ.

In step S4510, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that if the set production mode is the normal production mode, the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21". ” to “P24”, the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect from “0” to “99” is selected based on the battle pre-suggestion cut-in execution lottery table shown in FIG. 57(A). Random numbers for production execution lottery are used to draw a lottery for execution of battle advance suggestion cut-in production. As a result, when it is decided to execute the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance, the content of the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance (execution timing of the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance (see Figures 60 and 61), the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance display of image ZK1, etc.) is determined.

In addition, in step S4510, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that if the set production mode is the normal production mode, the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern. If it is any one from "P21" to "P24", based on the execution lottery table of the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance shown in FIG. 57(B), the cooperation advance suggestion is "0" to "99". A random number for the cut-in performance execution lottery is used to draw a lottery for the execution of the cut-in performance suggested in advance of the collaboration. As a result, when it is decided to execute the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance, the contents of the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance (execution timing of the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance (see Figures 62 and 63), the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance display of image ZK2, etc.) is determined.

Subsequently, in step S4510, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that if the set production mode is the normal production mode, the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is the special figure 1 variation. If the pattern is any one of "P01" to "P08" and "P21" to "P24", "0" to " Using the random number for execution of development suggestion performance of ``99'', a lottery is conducted to determine which of the battle development suggestion performance, cooperation development suggestion performance, or non-execution of development suggestion performance. As a result, when it is decided to execute the battle development suggestion performance, the contents of the battle development suggestion performance (execution timing of the battle development suggestion performance (see FIG. 60), display of the battle development suggestion character image IS1, etc.) are determined. Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the cooperation development suggestion performance, the contents of the cooperation development suggestion performance (execution timing of the cooperation development suggestion performance (see FIG. 62), display of the cooperation development suggestion character image IS2, etc.) are determined.

Subsequently, in step S4510, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines that if the set production mode is the normal production mode, the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is the special figure 1 variation. In the case of any of the patterns "P21" to "P24", and when it is determined that the development suggestion performance is not to be executed, based on the execution lottery table of the super hot suggestion performance shown in FIG. 58(B) Then, using random numbers from "0" to "99" for execution of the super-hot suggestion performance, a lottery is drawn to decide whether to execute the super-hot suggestion performance or not to perform the super-hot suggestion performance. When it is decided to execute the super hot suggestion performance, the contents of the super hot suggestion performance (execution timing of the super hot suggestion performance (see FIGS. 61 and 63), display of the super hot suggestion performance image GE, etc.) are determined. .

Following S4510, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects the selected performance symbol, the special figure variation performance pattern, the preview performance (for example, the first icon change performance of the first performance mode (see FIGS. 42 to 45), and the second performance. The first icon change effect (see FIGS. 46 to 48), the second icon change effect, the third icon change effect, the battle advance suggestion cut-in effect (see FIG. 57(A)), and the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in effect (see FIG. 57(A)). Based on the development suggestion production (battle development suggestion production, cooperation development suggestion production, super hot suggestion production, see Figure 58)), a variable production start command is produced to start the variation production. This process is then set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 (S4511). When the fluctuation performance start command set in S4511 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), a special symbol fluctuation performance synchronized with the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started on the display unit 50a.

In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure variation effect using images performed on the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect using audio output from the speaker 52, and the special figure variation effect using light emitted from the frame lamp 53. It includes the performance contents of the figure fluctuation performance and the performance contents of the special figure fluctuation performance based on the actions performed by the upper board movable body 55k and the lower board movable body 56k.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special symbol variation production content indicated by the special symbol variation production start command sent to the image control board 140 while the special symbol variation production using images is being performed by the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs audio via the audio control circuit 161 (executing a special figure variation effect using audio), and causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light via the lamp control circuit 151 (executing a special figure variation effect by emitting light). The above-board movable body 55k and the under-board movable body 56k are actuated (a special figure variable performance is executed by the movement).

9. Effects of the Embodiment As described above in detail, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the change suggestion display mode indicates that the second icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure change effect. The icon TA5 is changed to the icon in a development suggestion display mode indicating development to SPSP reach. As a result, after the player understands that the second icon change effect will be executed by the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode, the player is directed to SPSP reach by the icon in the changed development suggestion display mode. This makes it possible to understand that it will be developed. Therefore, depending on the display mode of the icon, it is possible to entertain the player by letting him/her know in advance the development of the special figure variation effect.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, in the second icon change performance, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon in the development suggestion display mode, and then the special figure variation production is performed. It becomes possible to develop it into either a battle reach or a cooperative reach. As a result, by changing the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode to the icon in the development suggestion display mode, it becomes possible to increase the player's emotions toward the development of SPSP reach in the special figure variation effect, and the game It becomes possible to improve interest.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode (the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, When the N reach is executed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, the icon TA7 in the development suggestion display mode changes to the icon TA in the expectation display mode (second expectation display mode, third expectation display mode). changed to As a result, it is possible to entertain the player by allowing the player to grasp the development of the special figure variation effect and the degree of jackpot expectation based on the display mode of the icon TA.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when N reach is executed during the execution of the special symbol variation effect, the corresponding icon (battle development suggestion) in the development suggestion display mode is displayed in the third icon change effect. The icon TA6 in the display mode, the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode, the icon TA7) It is possible to draw attention to whether the icon TA is changed. This makes the change from the development suggestion display mode to the expectation level display mode more enjoyable.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode are round and have the same shape; The colors of the icon TA3 in the display mode and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode are different. As a result, by looking at the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode displayed on the display unit 50a, it is possible to determine which expectation display mode the icon in the development suggestion display mode corresponds to. It becomes possible to easily determine whether the icon has changed in its aspect.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the execution of the N reach is started during the execution of the special symbol variation effect, a message is displayed on the display unit 50a. The icon in the development suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode. As a result, when the relevant icon in the development suggestion display mode is displayed, N reach will be executed after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the execution of N reach was started during the execution of the special figure variation effect. It becomes possible to enjoy the third icon change performance.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the first icon change effect in which the movable body 55k on the board is moved is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the first expectation level display mode. The icon TA is changed to any of the icon TA2 in the second expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode. As a result, when the first icon change effect in which the on-board movable body 55k is moved is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode, the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA2 in the second expectation display mode, It is possible to draw attention to which expectation level display mode the icon TA is changed to, either the icon TA3 or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode. Therefore, by moving the movable body 55k on the board and changing the display mode of the icon TA, it is possible to entertain the player by giving him a feeling of expectation of a big win.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the movable body performance of the first performance mode is executed in the first icon change performance of the first performance mode, the icon TA1 of the normal display mode changes to the first icon change performance of the first performance mode. The icon TA is changed to any one of the icon TA2 in the expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode. On the other hand, in the first icon change production of the second production mode, when the movable body production of the second production mode is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the third icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode. The expectation level display mode is changed to the icon TA4. This makes it possible to entertain the players by making them look forward to which expectation display mode the icon TA will be changed to by the movement of the movable body 55k on the board in the first icon change performance. .

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, in the first icon change performance, the movable body performance in the first performance mode or the second movable body performance in which the jackpot expectation level is higher than the movable body performance in the first performance mode. After drawing attention to whether or not the movable body effect of the effect mode will be executed, it is possible to draw attention to the expectation level display mode in which the display mode of the icon TA changes from the normal display mode. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy the game by predicting whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the presentation mode of the movable body presentation executed in the first icon change presentation and the display mode of the icon TA.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the movable object effect is executed, the icon TA in the normal display mode is moved from the icon display area 50e to the icon change area 50h. Then, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h becomes the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA3 in the third expectation display mode. The icon TA is changed to one of the icons TA4. This makes it easier to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the icon TA moved to the icon change area 50h, making it possible to visually entertain the player.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed, the on-board movable body image KG (first board movable body image) imitating the on-board movable body 55k is displayed on the display section 50a. KG1 and the second board movable object image KG2) are displayed. While the on-board movable object image KG is displayed on the display section 50a, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the third expectation display mode. The icon TA is changed to any one of the icons TA4 in the display mode. As a result, by executing the movable body effect, the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) displayed on the display section 50a is changed to the normal display mode. It is possible to give an impression that the changes in the icon TA1 are related. Therefore, in the first icon change effect, the display mode of the icon TA is changed by the on-board movable body 55k and the on-board movable body image KG (the first board movable body image KG1 and the second board movable body image KG2). It becomes possible to visually entertain the player until the change is made.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the production branching point indicates either a battle mode in which the main character and the horse character battle in the special drawing variation production, or a joint fight mode in which the main character and the horse character fight together. When the battle development suggestion performance is executed in the branching performance executed in , the game will then proceed to the battle reach. On the other hand, in the branching production executed at the branching point of the special figure variation production, which shows either a battle mode in which the main character and the horse character fight together, or a cooperative fight mode in which the main character and the horse character fight together, the production suggests the development of a cooperative fight. Once executed, it will lead to joint reach. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp which SPSP reach is to be reached in the special figure variation performance by the battle development suggestion performance or cooperation development suggestion performance executed at the time of performance branching during execution of the branch performance. Therefore, by making the player interested in the development suggestion performance in the branch performance at the time of performance branching, it is possible to thrill and entertain the player.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the super hot suggestion performance is executed instead of the battle development suggestion performance during execution of the branch performance and the game advances to battle reach, it is better to proceed to the battle reach while the branch performance is being executed. When the cooperation development suggestion effect is executed, the expectation level of the jackpot is higher than when proceeding to the cooperation reach (see FIG. 59). As a result, even when proceeding to battle reach, it is possible to make the player expect to perform a super hot suggestion performance instead of a battle development suggestion production at the time of production branching. Therefore, by creating interest in which of the battle development suggestion production, cooperation development suggestion production, or super hot suggestion production will be executed at the time of production branching, the special pattern variation production can be enjoyed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the super hot suggestion performance is executed instead of the cooperation development suggestion performance during the execution of the branch performance and the progress is made to the joint play reach, it is better to proceed to the joint play reach during the execution of the branch performance. When the cooperation development suggestion effect is executed, the expectation level of the jackpot is higher than when proceeding to the cooperation reach (see FIG. 59). As a result, if a super hot suggestion performance is executed at the time of production branching and progresses to a joint battle reach, it is possible to create more expectations for a jackpot than when a joint struggle development suggestion performance is executed and proceed to a joint battle reach. It becomes possible. Therefore, when the super hot suggestion performance is executed at the time of production branching and progresses to a joint battle reach, it is possible to enjoy the special figure variation production with peace of mind.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when proceeding to either SPSP reach out of battle reach or cooperative reach, a jackpot occurs when a super hot suggestion performance is executed during execution of a branch performance. The expectation level is about 93% and 94%. As a result, when the super-hot suggestion performance is executed at the time of performance branching, the expectation level of jackpot is substantially the same when proceeding to either SPSP reach of battle reach or cooperative reach. With such a configuration, when the super hot suggestion performance is executed at the time of performance branching during the execution of the branch performance, it is possible to greatly increase expectations for a jackpot. Therefore, to make the player's heart flutter by drawing attention to which of the battle development suggestion production, cooperation development suggestion production, or super hot suggestion production will be executed at the production branch point during execution of the branch production. becomes possible.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, before the development suggestion performance is executed at the time of production branching, a battle pre-suggestion cut-in production that suggests proceeding to battle reach, or proceeding to cooperative reach is performed. A cut-in performance hinting at the joint fight will be performed. As a result, before the development suggestion production is executed at the point of branching the production, it is possible to know in advance which SPSP reach to proceed to, battle development suggestion production, cooptation reach, etc. It is possible to enjoy which of the development-suggesting performance or the extremely hot-suggesting performance will be executed.

10. Modification Example Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of the modification example, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. Furthermore, the technical features in the first embodiment and the modified examples described below can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification.

In the first embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 correspond to the "predetermined condition", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, another starting port different from the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided, and winning of a game ball to the other starting port corresponds to the "predetermined condition". It should be noted that the winning of a game ball in another starting hole may become an opportunity for a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) lottery (a jackpot lottery, that is, acquisition and determination of a jackpot random number, etc.).

Although the jackpot game in the first embodiment corresponds to the "special game state", the present invention is not limited to this. A jackpot game and other game states may correspond to a "special game state." Further, a jackpot game or other game state may correspond to a "special game state." Here, the other gaming state may be any one of a high probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, or a low probability high base gaming state. Further, the other gaming states may be two gaming states among a high probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, or a low probability high base gaming state. In addition, the other gaming states may be a high probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, and a low probability high base gaming state.

The battle reach and cooperative reach in the first embodiment corresponded to "suggestive effects." However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is a performance that suggests the expectation of a jackpot, then a specific effect image displayed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board lamp, etc. 54 in a particular light-emitting manner, a pending icon notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc. may correspond to the "suggestion effect" of the present invention.

The hold icon HA and the icon TA of the first embodiment correspond to the "predetermined icon". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the hold icon HA or the icon TA may correspond to a "predetermined icon."

In the first embodiment, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA other than the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode may be changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode. The icons TA other than the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode include the icon TA1 in the normal display mode, the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, and the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode. The icon TA4 may have a 3-expectation level display mode.

In the second icon change effect of the first embodiment, the first icon change trigger image HE1 was displayed on the display section 50a. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the second icon change effect is different from the third icon change effect in which the second icon change trigger image HE2 is displayed, what kind of effect image is displayed on the display section 50a, or what kind of effect image is displayed on the display section 50a, or when the panel lamp 54 is displayed. It may also be a preview effect that causes the light to emit light in a specific light emission mode.

The icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode of the first embodiment was composed of a character image "in preparation" and a triangular effect image. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA may have any display mode as long as it has a display mode that indicates that the second icon change effect is to be performed.

The icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode of the first embodiment was composed of a character image of "Battle" and a triangular effect image. However, it is not limited to this. For example, any display mode of the icon TA may be used as long as the icon TA has a display mode that indicates proceeding to battle reach during execution of the special figure variation effect.

The icon TA7 in the cooperative struggle development suggestion display mode of the first embodiment was composed of a character image of "cooperative struggle" and a triangular effect image. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA may have any display mode as long as the icon TA has a display mode that indicates proceeding to a cooperative reach during the execution of the special figure variation effect.

The icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode of the first embodiment is the icon TA indicating that the second icon change effect is to be executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode may be the icon TA that suggests that the second icon change effect will be executed, that is, the icon TA that indicates the possibility that the second icon change effect will be executed. good.

The icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode of the first embodiment was the icon TA in a display mode indicating that the game will proceed to battle reach during the execution of the special figure variation effect. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode suggests proceeding to battle reach while the special figure variation effect is being executed, that is, indicates that there is a possibility of proceeding to battle reach while the special figure variation effect is being executed. It may be the icon TA.

The icon TA7 in the cooperative development suggestion display mode of the first embodiment was the icon TA in a display mode indicating that the game should advance to a cooperative reach during the execution of the special figure variation effect. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA7 in the cooperative development suggestion display mode indicates that there is a possibility of proceeding to cooperative reach while the special pattern variation effect is being executed, that is, it indicates that there is a possibility of proceeding to cooperative reach while the special pattern variation effect is being executed. It may be the icon TA.

In the first embodiment, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, and then the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode changes to the icon TA (the icon TA6 in the expectation level display mode). After changing to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode, the game progressed to battle reach. However, it is not limited to this. For example, after the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode during execution of the special figure variation effect, the battle reach can be started at any timing.

In the first embodiment, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode, and then the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode changes to the icon TA (the icon TA7 in the expectation level display mode). After changing to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode, the player proceeded to joint reach. However, it is not limited to this. For example, after the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode during the execution of the special figure variation performance, you may proceed to the cooperative reach at any timing.

The change suggestion display mode of the icon TA5 in the first embodiment corresponds to the "specific display mode" of the present invention. However, it is not limited to this. Any display mode may correspond to the "specific display mode" as long as it indicates that the first icon change effect is to be executed.

The battle development suggestion display mode of the icon TA6 and the cooperation development suggestion display mode of the icon TA7 in the first embodiment are the "special display mode" of the present invention. However, it is not limited to this. For example, any display mode may correspond to the "special display mode" as long as it indicates that SPSP reach is to be executed.

In the first embodiment, after the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode, N reach ends, After SP Reach and branching effects, it was transitioned to Battle Reach or Collaborative Reach. However, it is not limited to this. For example, as soon as the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, or the icon TA7 in the cooperative development suggestion display mode, the icon TA5 is immediately shifted to battle reach or cooperation reach. good. For example, after the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode, when N reach ends, the battle reach or It may be moved to joint reach. If the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode, the timing to shift to SPSP reach is determined by the timing of the transition to SPSP reach, which will interfere with the game. It may be changed as appropriate without causing any problems.

There were three types: a first expectation level display mode for the icon TA2 of the first embodiment, a second expectation level display mode for the icon TA3, and a third expectation level display mode for the icon TA4. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the number of types of expectation level display modes may be two or less, or four or more.

The fact that a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the execution of N reach was started during the execution of the special figure variation effect in the first embodiment corresponded to the "specific condition". However, it is not limited to this. For example, a specific effect image may be displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound may be output from the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53 or the board lamp 54 may be emitted in a specific light emission mode, etc. A condition that includes may correspond to a "specific condition."

The second expectation level display mode in the first embodiment corresponded to the "first expectation display mode", and the third expectation level display mode corresponded to the "second expectation display mode". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first expectation display mode may correspond to the "first expectation display mode", and the second expectation display mode may correspond to the "second expectation display mode". Further, for example, the first expectation level display mode may correspond to the "first expectation display mode", and the third expectation level display mode may correspond to the "second expectation display mode".

In the first embodiment, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode is replaced by the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA3 in the third expectation display mode. Changed to TA4. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, or the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode. Also good. Also, for example, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode or the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode changes to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode. It's okay to be.

The icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode of the first embodiment have the same round shape, but the color were different. However, it is not limited to this. For example, among the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode, the icon TA in two types of expectation display modes. The shapes may be the same but the colors may be different, and the icon TA in the remaining one type of expectation level display mode may be configured to have a different shape and color from the icons TA in the two types of expectation level display modes.

The shapes of the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode of the first embodiment were round. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the shapes of the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. You may change it to For example, it may be a star shape, a square, a diamond, or the like.

The special figure variation performance of the first embodiment corresponds to the "judgment result suggestion performance" and the "judgment result performance". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is a performance that suggests the result of a jackpot determination, specify a specific effect image displayed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, and a board lamp 54. A production in which light is emitted in the light emission mode, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc. may correspond to the "judgment result suggestion production" and "judgment result production" of the present invention.

The N reach in the first embodiment corresponds to a "specific reach effect." However, it is not limited to this. For example, L reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, etc. may correspond to a "specific reach effect."

The fact that a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the execution of N reach was started during the execution of the special figure variation effect in the first embodiment corresponded to the "specific condition". However, it is not limited to this. As long as the conditions include the execution of N reach, they may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. For example, the “specific condition” may be that the execution of N reach is started during the execution of the special figure variation effect. Further, for example, the “specific condition” may be that the execution of the N reach is terminated during the execution of the special symbol variation effect. Further, for example, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, it may be possible to execute a pseudo continuous performance in which variable display of the performance symbol EZ is displayed a predetermined number of times in one special symbol fluctuation performance. In this case, for example, when performing variable display of the effect pattern EZ three times in the pseudo continuous effect, the execution of N reach is started during the second variable display of the effect pattern EZ in the pseudo continuous effect, and for a predetermined period of time. (for example, 1 second), the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode and the icon TA7 in the cooperation development suggestion display mode displayed on the display section 50a change to the icon TA in the expectation display mode (first expectation display mode). The icon TA2 in the degree display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode. In this case, it may correspond to the "specific condition" that a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since execution of the N reach was started during the second fluctuating display of the performance symbol EZ in the pseudo-continuous performance. .

In the second icon change performance of the first embodiment, during execution of the special figure variation performance, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed on the display unit 50a is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode, Alternatively, it was an effect that changed the icon to TA7 in a display mode suggesting cooperation development. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the second icon change effect is to replace the hold icon HA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed on the display unit 50a with the hold icon HA5 in the battle development suggestion display mode that indicates proceeding to battle reach during the execution of the special figure variation effect. It may be a pre-reading effect that changes to HA6 or a pending icon HA7 in a cooperative development suggestion display mode indicating proceeding to cooperative reach during the execution of the special figure variation effect.

The third icon change performance of the first embodiment is performed by using the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode or the icon TA7 in the cooperative battle development suggestion display mode displayed on the display unit 50a during the execution of the special figure variation production. This was an effect that changed the icon TA2 to the icon TA2 in the second expectation display mode or the icon TA3 in the third expectation display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the third icon change effect is to change the pending icon HA6 of the battle development suggestion display mode displayed on the display unit 50a, or the pending icon HA7 of the cooperation development suggestion display mode, to the pending icon HA2 of the second expectation level display mode, Alternatively, it may be a look-ahead effect that changes the hold icon HA3 in the third expectation level display mode.

The on-board movable body 55k of the first embodiment corresponds to the "movable body". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the under-panel movable body 56k may correspond to the "movable body". Further, for example, the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k may correspond to the "movable body". Further, for example, the frame movable device 58 may correspond to a "movable body". Further, for example, the above-board movable body 55k, the below-board movable body 56k, and the frame moving device 58 may correspond to the "movable body".

In the first icon change production of the first embodiment, after the execution of the movable body production is completed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA2 in the expectation display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode). , the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, during execution of the movable body effect in the first icon change effect, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA in the expectation level display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA2 in the second expectation level display mode) The icon TA3 may be changed to the icon TA4) in the third expectation level display mode. For example, at the same time as the execution of the movable body effect in the first icon change effect is completed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA in the expectation level display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the second icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, The icon TA3 in the expectation level display mode may be changed to the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode.

The normal display mode of the icon TA1 in the first embodiment corresponds to the "icon in a predetermined display mode" of the present invention. For example, a display mode other than the normal display mode of the icon TA may correspond to the "predetermined display mode" of the present invention. In this case, for example, display modes other than the normal display mode include expectation display modes (first expectation display mode, second expectation display mode, third expectation display mode), battle development suggestion display mode, cooperation suggestion It may be a display mode, etc.

In the first icon change production of the first embodiment, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is the icon TA in the expectation display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA2 in the second expectation display mode). TA3, the icon was changed to TA4) in the third expectation level display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the first icon change effect is executed, the pending icon HA1 in the normal display mode becomes the pending icon HA in the expectation display mode (the pending icon HA2 in the first expectation display mode, the pending icon HA2 in the second expectation display mode) HA3 may be changed to a hold icon HA4) in the third expectation level display mode.

The operation of the on-board movable body 55k from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C) in the first embodiment corresponds to the "first movable mode". The movement of the on-board movable body 55k from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. 37(D) in the first embodiment corresponds to the "second movable mode". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the motion of the movable body 55k on the board is different between the movable body performance in the first performance mode and the movable body performance in the second performance mode, the movement of the different movable body 55k on the board is It may correspond to the "aspect" and the "second movable aspect."

In the first embodiment, the operation of the movable body 55k on the board is different between the movable body performance in the first performance mode and the movable body performance in the second performance mode, and the light emission of the movable body LED 55L included in the movable body 55k on the board is different. The colors were also different. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the movable body 55k on the board is different between the movable body performance in the first performance mode and the movable body performance in the second performance mode, but the emitted light color of the movable body LED 55L provided in the movable body 55k on the board is the same. It's okay.

In the first icon change production in the first production mode of the first embodiment, when the movable body production in the first production mode is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode. It was easier to change to the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode. However, it is not limited to this. In the first icon change production in the first production mode of the first embodiment, when the movable body production in the first production mode is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode. The rate of change to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode may be the same as the rate of change to the icon TA3.

In the first icon change production in the second production mode of the first embodiment, when the movable body production in the second production mode is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode. The icon is not changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first icon change performance in the second performance mode of the first embodiment, when the movable body performance in the second performance mode is executed, the corresponding icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the corresponding icon TA1 in the first expectation display mode. The icon may be changed to icon TA2. In this case, when the movable body performance in the second performance mode is executed, the rate at which the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode is higher than the rate at which the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode. The configuration may be such that the rate of change to the icon TA3 or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode is high.

In the first embodiment, the expectation of a jackpot was higher for the movable body performance in the second performance mode than for the movable body performance in the first performance mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, there may be three types of presentation modes for the movable body presentation: a first presentation mode, a second presentation mode, and a third presentation mode. In this case, for example, among the three types of presentation modes, the expected jackpot for the movable body presentation in the third presentation mode is the highest, followed by the highest jackpot expectation for the movable body presentation in the second presentation mode, and then the first The expected level of jackpot in the movable body performance of the performance mode may be low. In this case, for example, when a movable object effect in the first effect mode is executed in the first icon change effect, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is replaced by the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, The icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode is changed to the icon TA in either the expectation display mode, and the second display is performed in the first icon change production. When the movable object effect of the mode is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is either the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode. When the icon TA in the expectation display mode is changed and the movable body production in the third production mode is executed in the first icon change production, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the third expectation display mode. The configuration may be such that the icon TA4 is changed to the icon TA4. As a result, in the first icon change production, it is possible to create interest and enjoy which of the three types of production modes of movable body production will be executed. Become.

The icon display area 50e in the first embodiment (see, for example, FIGS. 42(A) and 46(A)) corresponds to a "predetermined display position." However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is different from the display position for changing to the icon TA in the expectation display mode in the first icon change effect, some display area on the display section 50a may be It may correspond to "display position".

The icon change area 50h in the first embodiment (see, for example, FIGS. 42(A) and 46(A)) corresponds to a "specific display position." However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is in the display position for changing to the icon TA in the expectation display mode in the first icon change effect, the icon display area 50e of the display unit 50a and the icon change area A display area different from 50h may correspond to a "specific display position."

The icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h of the first embodiment is the icon TA in the expectation display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA2 in the second expectation display mode) The icon TA3 was changed to the icon TA4) in the third expectation level display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is changed to the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, or the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode. The configuration may be such that the icon TA4 in the 3 expectation level display mode does not change.

In the first embodiment, the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) is displayed on the display section 50a at the same time as the execution of the movable body effect ends. (See Figures 40 and 41). However, it is not limited to this. For example, during execution of the movable body performance, the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) may be displayed on the display section 50a. In this case, after the execution of the movable body effect is finished, the display of the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) on the display section 50a is finished. Also good. For example, at the same time as the execution of the movable body effect ends, the display of the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) ends on the display section 50a. Also good.

In the first embodiment, while the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) is displayed on the display unit 50a, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is expected. The icon TA has been changed to the icon TA in the degree display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) is not displayed on the display section 50a, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed at the first expectation level. The display mode is changed to the icon TA2, and the first expectation level display mode is changed while the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) is displayed on the display section 50a. The icon TA2 may be changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode.

The first on-board movable object image KG1 and the second on-board movable object image KG2 in the first embodiment correspond to "movable object images". However, it is not limited to this. For example, a movable body image simulating the on-board movable body 55k that is held in the operating position shown in FIG. A movable body image imitating the on-board movable body 55k that is held in the operating position shown in 37(D) and is equipped with a movable body LED 55L lit in red light emission color is a "movable body image". It may correspond to "image".

The SPSP reach in the first embodiment corresponds to the "expected transition performance." However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is possible to shift to a specific performance that suggests jackpot expectations other than reach performance in the special symbol variation performance, that specific performance may correspond to the "expectation transition performance".

The battle reach in the first embodiment corresponded to the "low expectation transition performance", and the joint battle reach corresponded to the "high expectation transition performance". However, it is not limited to this. For example, N reach may correspond to "low expectation transition performance" and L reach may correspond to "high expectation transition performance". Furthermore, for example, the L reach may correspond to a "low expectation transition performance" and the SP reach may correspond to a "high expectation transition performance." In addition, for example, SP reach may correspond to "low expectation transition performance" and SPSP reach may correspond to "high expectation transition performance".

The battle development suggestion production and the cooperation development suggestion production in the first embodiment correspond to the "expectation suggestion production." However, it is not limited to this. If it is a production that suggests a transition to SPSP reach, a specific effect image displayed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, a specific frame lamp 53 and a board lamp 54 are displayed. A production in which light is emitted in a light-emitting manner, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc. may correspond to the "expectation-suggesting production" of the present invention.

In the first embodiment, the battle development suggestion performance corresponded to a "low expectation suggestion performance", and the cooperation development suggestion performance corresponded to a "high expectation suggestion performance". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is a production that suggests a transition to battle reach, a specific effect image displayed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board lamp 54, etc. A production that causes light to emit light in a specific light emission mode, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc. may correspond to the "low expectation suggestion production" of the present invention. For example, if it is a production that suggests a transition to a cooperative reach, a specific effect image displayed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board lamp, etc. 54 in a specific light emission mode, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc. may correspond to the "high expectation suggestion production" of the present invention.

The performance branching point at which the special figure variation performance branches to either the cooperative reach or the battle reach in the first embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined branching time" of the present invention. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the performance branching time point at which the special figure variation performance branches to either normal loss or N reach may correspond to the "predetermined branching time point" of the present invention. Further, for example, the performance branching time point at which the special figure variation performance branches to any of the N reach, L reach, and SP reach may correspond to the "predetermined branching time" of the present invention. In addition, for example, the performance branch time point at which the special figure variation performance branches to any of the L reach, SP reach, or branch performance may correspond to the "predetermined branch time" of the present invention.

In the first embodiment, the super hot suggestion performance in which the super hot suggestion performance image GE indicating "super hot" is displayed on the display section 50a corresponds to the "specific performance." However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is a performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot instead of a battle development suggestion production or a cooperation development suggestion production, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 and output from the speaker 52 are displayed. A specific sound, a production that causes the frame lamp 53 or the board lamp 54 to emit light in a specific light emission mode, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc. correspond to the "specific production" of the present invention. It's okay.

In the first embodiment, the super-hot suggestion performance in which the super-hot suggestion production image GE indicating "super hot" is displayed on the display unit 50a is a production with higher jackpot expectations than the battle development suggestion production or the cooperation development suggestion production. Met. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the performance suggesting a super hot game may have the same or substantially the same level of jackpot expectation as the performance suggesting a battle development or the performance suggesting a cooperative fight development.

In the first embodiment described above, in the branching performance, instead of the battle development suggestion performance, a super hot suggestion performance is executed, and when proceeding to battle reach, the branching performance executes the cooperation development suggestion performance, and the cooperation development suggestion performance is executed. This was a configuration in which the expectation of a jackpot was higher than when going to reach. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a special performance other than a preliminary suggestion cut-in production, a super hot suggestion production, or a development suggestion production may be performed in the branch production. In this case, for example, in the branching performance, instead of the battle development suggestion performance, a super hot suggestion performance is executed and the progression to battle reach is performed, and in the branching performance, a cooperation development suggestion performance and a special performance are executed, The jackpot expectation level may be substantially the same or the same as when proceeding to joint reach. The special effects include a specific effect image displayed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, an effect that causes the frame lamp 53 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a specific light emission mode, It may be a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, or the like.

In the first embodiment described above, in the case where a super hot suggestion performance is executed instead of a cooperation development suggestion performance in the branching performance and progressing to the joint struggle reach, the cooperation development suggestion performance is executed in the branching performance and the cooperation development suggestion performance is executed. This was a configuration in which the expectation of a jackpot was higher than when going to reach. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a special performance other than a preliminary suggestion cut-in production, a super hot suggestion production, or a development suggestion production may be performed in the branch production. In this case, for example, in the branching performance, instead of the collaboration development suggestion performance, a super hot suggestion performance is executed, and then a special performance is further executed, and the progress is to the joint struggle reach, and in the branching performance, the cooperation development suggestion production is executed. It may be a configuration in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher when it is executed and progresses to joint reach.

In the first embodiment described above, in the case where a super exciting suggestion performance is executed in place of a battle development suggestion production in a branching production and proceeding to battle reach, and in a case where a super hot suggestion production is performed in place of a cooperation development suggestion production in a branching production. The expected jackpot was essentially the same as when the game was executed and the game proceeded to joint reach. However, it is not limited to this. In the branching performance, a super hot suggestion performance is executed instead of a battle development suggestion performance, and the jackpot expectation level (for example, 90%) when proceeding to battle reach, and in the branching performance, instead of a cooperation development suggestion performance The jackpot expectation level (for example, 90%) may be exactly the same as when the hot-suggesting performance is executed and the player advances to the joint reach. As a result, from the player's perspective, in the branching performance, instead of the battle development suggestion performance, a super hot suggestion performance is executed and the player advances to the battle reach, and in the branching performance, instead of the cooperation development suggestion performance, a super hot performance is performed. This is because it is possible to make the player feel that the expectation level of the jackpot is the same in the case where the suggestion effect is executed and the player advances to the cooperative reach.

In the first embodiment described above, during the execution of the branching effect in the special figure fluctuation effect, before the development suggestion effect (battle development suggestion effect, cooperation development suggestion effect) or super hot suggestion effect is executed, the battle pre-suggestion is performed. A cut-in performance or a cut-in performance suggesting advance cooperation was executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, before the development suggestion production (battle development suggestion production, cooperation development suggestion production) or super hot suggestion production is executed in the special figure variation production, at any timing in the special picture variation production, the battle pre-suggestion cut An in-effect or a cut-in effect suggesting cooperation in advance may be performed.

In the first embodiment, the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance in which the battle advance suggestion cut-in performance image ZK1 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the cooperation advance suggestion in which the cooperation advance suggestion cut-in performance image ZK2 is displayed on the display section 50a. The cut-in production corresponded to the "pre-transition suggestion production." However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is an effect that suggests a transition to SPSP reach, either battle reach or cooperative reach, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, output from the speaker 52, etc. A specific sound, a production that causes the frame lamp 53 or the board lamp 54 to emit light in a specific light emission mode, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc. correspond to the "pre-transition suggestion production" of the present invention. Also good.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first starting port 11 (fixed starting port) does not change the ease with which the game ball enters, and the second starting port 12 (variable) allows the ease with which the game ball enters the ball to change. Although a starting port and a starting port related to the electric chew 12D are provided, only one of them may be provided.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 determination process is performed with priority over the special figure 1 determination process (the variable display of special figure 2 is performed with priority over the variable display of special figure 1). However, it may be configured such that the special figure 1 determination process is performed with priority over the special figure 2 determination process (the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed with priority over the variable display of the special figure 2). In this case, it is preferable to make the special drawing 1 drawing a drawing that is easier to win a jackpot that is more advantageous than the special drawing 2 drawing.

Further, in the first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, but it can also be applied to other pinball game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball game machine.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is performed approximately in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Instead, it may be composed of a pattern other than three, such as two. For example, two separate patterns may be provided, special pattern 1 and special pattern 2. Further, one common symbol may be provided for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In these cases, the information may be displayed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50, and the sub-control board 120 may be controlled. Further, an LED device for displaying symbols may be provided in an area other than the game area 6 of the game board 1. In this case, the main control board 100 or the sub-control board 120 may control the LED device.

Further, in the first embodiment, the main control board 100 performs basic control regarding the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 120 performs basic control regarding the progress of the performance according to the progress of the game (control of the game). Although the control of the game and the control of the performance are performed by different boards as shown in FIG. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in that one board, or may be provided separately from that one board.

11. Inventions shown in the above embodiments The following inventions (inventions according to means A1 to A6, inventions according to means B1 to B5, inventions according to means C1 to C5) are shown in the above embodiments. . In the description of the invention described below, corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, and symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention related to means A1 is:
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the game ball hitting the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12), a special gaming state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is controlled. a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of determining whether or not to play;
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling a predetermined production;
A display unit (display unit 50a of the image display device 50) capable of displaying the effect,
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (SPSP reach (battle reach, joint fight reach)) that suggests the possibility of being controlled by the special game state,
The display unit is capable of displaying a predetermined icon (a pending icon HA, an icon TA) indicating that execution of the determination is on hold or that the determination has been executed;
The display mode of the predetermined icon can be changed from a specific display mode (change suggestion display mode (see FIG. 31(E))) to a special display mode different from the specific display mode (battle development suggestion display mode (see FIG. 31(F)), It is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode suggesting cooperation development (see Fig. 31 (G)),
The specific display mode is a display mode that suggests that the change production is executed,
The special display mode is a display mode that suggests that the suggestion effect is to be executed.
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the display mode of the predetermined icon indicating that the execution of the determination as to whether or not to be controlled to be in the special gaming state is pending or that the determination has been executed is changed to The specific display mode that suggests that the game will be executed is changed to the special display mode that suggests that a suggestive effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to a special gaming state will be executed. This makes it possible for the player to understand that a changing effect will be executed using a predetermined icon in a specific display mode, and then to have the player understand that a suggested effect will be executed based on the changed special display mode. . Therefore, depending on the display mode of the predetermined icon, it is possible to grasp the change in the display mode of the predetermined icon and the execution of the suggestive effect, increasing the player's feelings about the future development of the effect and increasing the interest in the game. becomes.

The invention related to means A2 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
The performance control means is
When the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed from the specific display mode to the special display mode in the change effect, the suggestion effect is executed;
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed from the specific display mode to the special display mode and the suggestion effect is executed, so that the suggestion effect is executed by the predetermined icon in the special display mode. This makes it possible to have a firm understanding of things. This makes it possible to draw attention to whether or not the display mode of a predetermined icon is changed from a specific display mode to a special display mode, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The invention related to means A3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means A1 or means A2,
The display mode of the predetermined icon includes an expectation display mode (first expectation display mode (see FIG. 31(B)) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the special gaming state, and a second expectation display mode (see FIG. 31(B)). 31(C)), and a third expectation level display mode (see FIG. 31(D)).
The performance control means is
When the predetermined icon of the special display mode is displayed, if a specific condition (N reach is executed during execution of the special figure variation effect) is satisfied, the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed to the special display mode. changing the display mode to the expected display mode;
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the special display mode that is changed from the specific display mode of the predetermined icon in the change effect changes to the expected display mode that indicates the possibility of being controlled to the special gaming state when a specific condition is met. be changed. This makes it possible to grasp the possibility of being controlled to a special gaming state by the changed expectation display mode after making the player aware of the execution of the suggestion performance based on the special display mode. Therefore, by changing the display mode of a predetermined icon, it is possible to make the player understand not only the development of the performance but also the possibility of being controlled into a special game state, thereby further increasing the player's feelings and increasing the interest in the game. It becomes possible.

The invention related to means A4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means A3,
The expectation display mode includes a first expectation display mode (second expectation display mode (see FIG. 31(C))), which is more likely to be controlled to the special gaming state than the first expectation display mode. There is a second expectation display mode (third expectation display mode (see FIG. 31(D)) that suggests that
The performance control means is
When the predetermined icon in the special display mode is displayed, if the specific condition is satisfied, the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed from the special display mode to the first expected display mode or the second expected display mode. change in appearance,
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when a specific condition is met, there is a possibility that the display mode of the predetermined icon will be controlled from the special display mode to the first expected suggestion mode, or to the special gaming state from the first expected suggestion mode. The expected display mode is changed to a second expected display mode indicating that the expected price is high. This makes it possible to draw attention to which expected display mode among the first expected suggestion mode or the second expected display mode the display mode of a predetermined icon is changed from the special display mode. Therefore, by making the expected display mode changed from the special display mode more interesting, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The invention related to means A5 is:
In the gaming machine described in means A4,
The predetermined icon of the first expected display mode and the predetermined icon of the second expected display mode are icons that have the same shape and different colors (see FIGS. 31(C) and 31(D));
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the player can determine whether the expected display mode changed from the special display mode is the first expected display mode or the second expected display mode based on the shape and color of the predetermined icon. It becomes possible to make it easier to do so. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game by making it easier for the player who looks at the display mode of the predetermined icon to understand whether the predetermined icon display mode is the first expected display mode or the second expected display mode. becomes possible.

The invention related to means A6 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means A3 to means A5,
The predetermined icon is the icon (the icon TA) indicating that the determination has been performed,
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a judgment result suggestion effect (special figure variation effect) that suggests the result of the judgment,
The suggestion performance can be executed in the judgment result suggestion performance,
The specific condition includes execution of a specific reach effect (N reach) in the judgment result suggestion effect,
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when a specific condition including execution of a specific reach effect in the judgment result suggestion effect is satisfied, the display mode of the icon suggests that the suggestion effect is executed in the judgment result suggestion effect. The special display mode is changed to the expected display mode. This draws the player's attention to the execution of a specific reach effect in the judgment result suggestion effect, and makes the player more interested in the expected display mode in which the display mode of the icon changes from the special display mode when a specific condition is met. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

<Means B>
The invention related to means B1 is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the game ball hitting the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12), a special gaming state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is controlled. a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of determining whether or not to play;
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling a predetermined production;
a display section (display section 50a of the image display device 50) capable of displaying the effect;
A movable body (on-board movable body 55k),
The performance control means is
The display unit is capable of displaying a predetermined icon (a pending icon HA, an icon TA) indicating that execution of the determination is on hold or that the determination has been executed;
When the movable body is moved, the display mode of the predetermined icon changes from the predetermined display mode (normal display mode (see FIG. 31(A))) to the first special display mode (first expectation level display mode (see FIG. 31(A)). (See FIG. 31(C) )),
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the movable body is moved, a predetermined message indicating that the execution of the determination as to whether or not to be controlled to the special gaming state is pending or that the determination has been executed is displayed. The display mode of the icon is changed from a predetermined display mode to a first special display mode, or a second special display mode that suggests that the possibility of being controlled to a specific gaming state is higher than the first special display mode. Thereby, when the movable body is moved, attention is drawn to whether or not the predetermined display mode of the predetermined icon displayed on the display section is changed to the first special display mode or the second special display mode. becomes possible. Therefore, by moving the movable body and changing the display mode of the predetermined icon, it becomes possible to make the player expect control to a special gaming state, and it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game.

The invention related to means B2 is:
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The movable mode of the movable body includes a first movable mode (the movable mode of the on-board movable body 55k shown in FIGS. 37(B) to 37(C)) and a second movable mode (movable mode) different from the first movable mode ( The movable mode of the movable body 55k on the board shown in FIGS. 37(B) to 37(D)),
The performance control means is
When the movable body is moved in the first movable mode, the display mode of the predetermined icon can be changed from the predetermined display mode to the first special display mode or the second special display mode,
When the movable body is moved in the second movable mode, the display mode of the predetermined icon is more easily changed from the predetermined display mode to the second special display mode than the first special display mode;
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the movable body is moved in the first movable mode, it is possible to expect a change from the predetermined display mode of the predetermined icon to the first special display mode or the second special display mode. becomes possible. On the other hand, when the movable body is moved in the second movable mode, it becomes possible to expect a change from the predetermined display mode of the predetermined icon to the second special display mode rather than the first special display mode. This makes it easier to understand which special display mode is to be changed from among the first special display mode and the second special display mode depending on the movable mode of the movable body, thereby increasing the interest in the game. becomes possible.

The invention related to means B3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means B2,
The second movable mode is a movable mode (see FIG. 39) that suggests that the special game state is more likely to be controlled than the first movable mode;
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, attention is paid to whether the movable mode of the movable body is the first movable mode or the second movable mode that is more likely to be controlled to a special gaming state than the first movable mode. , it is possible to draw attention to a special display mode in which the display mode of a predetermined icon is changed from the predetermined display mode. As a result, by letting the user understand to some extent the possibility of being controlled into a special gaming state based on the movement mode of the movable body and the special display mode of the predetermined icon, the user can enjoy the game by paying attention to the display mode of the predetermined icon. It becomes possible to increase the

The invention related to means B4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
The performance control means is
In the display section, the predetermined icon can be displayed at a predetermined display position (the icon display area 50e),
When the movable body is moved, the predetermined icon displayed at the predetermined display position is moved to a specific display position (the icon change area 50h) different from the predetermined display position,
The display mode of the predetermined icon displayed at the specific display position can be changed from the predetermined display mode to the first special display mode or the second special display mode;
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the display mode of the predetermined icon that is moved from the predetermined display position of the display section to a specific display position different from the predetermined display position by moving the movable body changes from the predetermined display mode. The display mode is changed to the first special display mode or the second special display mode. This makes it possible to visually entertain the player by drawing attention to the change in the display mode of a predetermined icon that has been moved to a specific display position when the movable object is moved, thereby increasing the interest in the game. .

The invention related to means B5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The performance control means is
When the movable body is moved, a movable body image imitating the movable body (first board movable body image KG1, second board movable body image KG2) can be displayed on the display section,
While displaying the movable object image, the display mode of the predetermined icon can be changed from the predetermined display mode to the first special display mode or the second special display mode;
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the movable body is moved, a movable body image imitating the movable body is displayed on the display section, and while the movable body image is displayed, the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed to the predetermined display mode. The display mode is changed to the first special display mode or the second special display mode. Thereby, when the movable body moves, the movable body image displayed on the display section and the display mode of a predetermined icon change, thereby making it possible to entertain the player and increase his interest in the game.

<Means C>
The invention related to means C1 is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the game ball hitting the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12), a special gaming state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is controlled. a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of determining whether or not to play;
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a judgment result production (special figure variation production) that suggests the result of the judgment,
The performance control means is
In the judgment result performance, it is possible to shift to an expectation transition performance (SPSP reach (battle reach, cooperative reach)) that indicates the degree of expectation controlled by the special game state,
In the judgment result performance, it is possible to perform an expectation suggestion performance (development suggestion performance) that suggests a transition to the expectation transition performance,
The expected transition performance includes a low expectation transition performance (battle reach) and a high expectation transition performance (cooperative reach) that suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled by the special game state is higher than the low expectation transition performance. can be,
The expectation-suggesting performance includes a low-expectations-suggesting performance (battle development-suggesting performance) that suggests a transition to the low-expectations transition performance, and a high-expectations-suggesting performance (cooperative development suggesting performance) that suggests a transition to the high-expectations transition performance. ) and
When the low expectation suggestion performance is executed at a predetermined branch point in the determination result production, the transition is made to the low expectation transition performance, while at the predetermined branch point, when the high expectation suggestion production is executed. Transitioned to the highly anticipated transition performance,
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the low expectation suggesting performance that suggests transition to the low expectation transition performance is executed at a predetermined performance branching point in the determination result performance, the transition to the low expectation transition performance is performed. On the other hand, at the predetermined performance branching point, if a high-expectation-suggesting performance that suggests a transition to a high-expectation transition performance is executed, it suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled to a special gaming state is higher than a low-expectation transition performance. It will be transitioned to a highly anticipated transition performance. As a result, at a predetermined performance branch point in the judgment result performance, depending on the expectation suggestion performance that is executed, it is possible to determine whether the judgment result performance will transition to a low expectation suggestion performance or a high expectation suggestion performance. It becomes possible to make them understand. Therefore, by making the player interested in the expectation-suggesting performance executed at a predetermined branch point in the determination result performance, it becomes possible to enjoy the determination result performance, and it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game.

The invention related to means C2 is
In the gaming machine according to means C1,
The performance control means is
In the determination result performance, a specific performance (super hot suggestion performance, see FIG. 65(D)) that suggests the degree of expectation to be controlled by the special gaming state can be executed;
When the specific performance is executed in place of the low-expectation-suggesting performance and the transition is to the low-expectation transition performance, compared to the case where the high-expectation-suggestion performance is executed and the transition is to the high-expectation transition performance, There is a high degree of expectation that the special gaming state will be controlled (see FIG. 59);
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is better to execute a specific performance instead of a low expectation suggestion performance and shift to a low expectation transition performance, than to execute a high expectation suggestion performance and shift to a high expectation transition performance. There is a higher expectation that the game will be controlled to a special gaming state than when the game is played. This makes it possible to create a sense of expectation that the specific performance will be executed and the transition to the low-expectation transition performance will occur at a predetermined performance branch point in the determination result performance. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by creating interest in which of the low-expectation-suggesting performance, high-expectation-suggesting performance, or specific performance will be executed in the judgment result performance. .

The invention related to means C3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means C2,
In the case where the specific performance is executed instead of the high expectation suggestive performance and the transition is made to the high expectation transition performance, than when the high expectation suggestion performance is executed and the transition is made to the high expectation transition performance, There is a high degree of expectation that the special gaming state will be controlled (see FIG. 59);
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when transitioning to either the low expectation transition performance or the high expectation transition performance, at the predetermined performance branch point of the determination result performance, the low expectation suggestive performance, Alternatively, even if a specific performance is executed in place of any of the high-expectation-suggesting performances, there is a high degree of expectation that the player will be controlled to a special gaming state. This makes it possible to arouse the player's desire for a specific performance to be executed in place of the expected transition performance in the determination result performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention related to means C4 is
In the gaming machine described in means C3,
In the case where the specific performance is executed in place of the low expectation suggestion performance and the transition is made to the low expectation transition performance, and in the case where the specific performance is executed in place of the high expectation suggestion performance and the transition is made to the high expectation transition performance. In the case where the expectation level controlled by the special gaming state is the same or substantially the same (see FIG. 59),
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, regardless of whether the judgment result performance is shifted to either the low expectation transition performance or the high expectation transition performance, the specific performance is executed at the predetermined performance branch point. If so, the expectations controlled by the special gaming state are the same or substantially the same. As a result, if the specific performance is executed at the predetermined performance branch point of the judgment result performance, the judgment result performance will transition to either the low expectation transition performance or the high expectation transition performance. However, it is possible to further increase the level of expectation for being controlled into a special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a specific performance will be executed at a predetermined performance branching point, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The invention related to means C5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The performance control means is
In the judgment result production, before executing the expectation suggestion production, a pre-transition suggestion production (battle pre-suggestion cut-in production (Figure 64 (C-1), Figure 65 (C) )), making it possible to execute cut-in effects suggesting cooperation in advance (see Fig. 64 (C-2)), Fig. 66 (C)),
This gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, in the judgment result performance, before the expectation suggestion performance is executed, the pre-transition suggestion performance that suggests a transition to the expectation shift performance is executed, thereby encouraging the player to shift to the low expectation performance. It is possible to know in advance which performance to transition to, either the performance or the highly anticipated transition performance. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the expectation-suggesting performance and the expectation-transition performance, with the user knowing in advance that the judgment result performance will transition to a low-expectation transition performance or a high-expectation transition performance, It becomes possible to increase interest in the game.

12. Second Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 72 to 91. In the description of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the same components as the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the above-described basic embodiment is also applied to the second embodiment. The pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is the same as the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, but is capable of displaying a so-called normal base on the 7-segment display 300, and is equipped with a function to prevent over-winning balls.

The pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is a so-called V-sure ST machine. In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, if there is a V passage (passing to the specific area 16) during a jackpot game, the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned ON (high probability high base state) at the end of the jackpot game. ), both the probability change counter and the time-saving counter are set to a predetermined value (160), and if there is no V passing during the jackpot game, only the time-saving flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game (setting the low probability high base state). , sets the time saving counter to a predetermined value (for example, 160).

<Electrical configuration in second embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 71 and 72. As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment includes a special drawing lottery, a variable display of special drawings, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a general drawing drawing, a variable display of normal drawings, and an auxiliary drawing. A game control board (hereinafter referred to as the "main control board") 100 that controls gaming profits such as games (progress of the game), and a game performance (special figure variation performance, hold performance, operation) according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 A performance control board (hereinafter referred to as "sub-control board") 120 that controls performances such as presentations, jackpot game performances, etc.) and customer waiting performances, and a payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, etc. It is provided further back than the image display device 50 of the board 1. The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section (main control section) that controls games. Further, the sub-control board 120 can be positioned as a production control section (sub-control section) that controls production, together with the image control board 140, the lamp control circuit 151, and the audio control circuit 161. The production control unit includes at least a sub-control board 120, and various types of production using production means (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, panel lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, etc.). It would be good if the performance could be controlled.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment includes a power supply board 190. The power supply board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, sub-control board 120, and payout control board 170, and also supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power supply board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 119 that can be pressed down. When the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 119 (specific operation means) clears game information stored in the game RAM 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 (described later) (for example, game state information such as a high probability state, number of special symbols on hold). This is for clearing (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear") the gaming CPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear"). As shown in FIG. 74, the RAM clear switch 119 is provided on a power supply board 190 placed on the back side of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 119 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the game parlor who can open and close the front door 23. In other words, the RAM clear switch 119 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. When the RAM clear switch 119 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 119 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 119 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 119 can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be provided on the main control board 100 or a dedicated board. It's okay.

A backup power supply circuit 192 is provided on the power supply board 190. The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment. do. Therefore, the information stored in the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 is retained even when the power is cut off to the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. Further, a power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches the power on/off. In addition, the main control board 100 may be provided with a backup power circuit for the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100, or the sub-control board 120 may be provided with a backup power circuit for the performance RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 71, a one-chip microcomputer for game control (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer for game control") 101 is mounted on the main control board 100, which controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment according to a program. There is. The gaming control microcomputer 101 includes a gaming ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a gaming RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a gaming ROM 103 is included.

The gaming ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, which will be described later. , auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with the above-mentioned special symbol reservation storage section 105, regular symbol reservation storage section 106, and the like. Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a non-erasable storage section 107, and the non-erasable storage section 107 is provided with a total prize ball number storage section 107a, a total fired ball number storage section 107b, and a difference ball number storage section 107c. It is being In the non-erasable storage section 107, even if RAM clear is executed, the gaming CPU 102 does not erase the stored contents. The non-erasable storage unit 107 (total prize ball number storage unit 107a, total fired ball number storage unit 107b, difference ball number storage unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) (see FIG. 74). As shown in FIG. 75, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display, and includes a total of 32 lighting (light-emitting) parts. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 includes, in order from left to right, a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 each have eight lighting parts (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, so that they can each represent numbers from "0" to "9". It has LB17 to LB24 and LB25 to LB32. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as an operating means when setting a setting value corresponding to the jackpot determination probability. The interior of the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated between an initial position and a rotational position with a setting key (not shown) inserted therein. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, the setting mode is enabled in which setting values can be set by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotation position and turning on the power while pressing and operating the RAM clear switch 119. can be moved to. In this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1". However, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, only one type of setting value, "1", is provided. Therefore, the set value cannot be changed from "1". Note that when the setting mode is set, if the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode is ended and RAM clear is executed.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed down. As shown in FIG. 74, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100 placed on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment. Therefore, the special reset switch 181 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the gaming hall who can open and close the front door 23. That is, the special reset switch 181 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be explained in detail later. Furthermore, a gaming I/O (Input/Output) port section 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals is mounted on the main control board 100.

Furthermore, various sensors MS and actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

Various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting hole sensor 11a, a second starting hole sensor 12a, a general winning hole sensor 10a, a gate sensor 13a, a first big winning hole sensor 14a, a second A big prize opening sensor 15a, a specific area sensor 16a, and a non-specific area sensor 17a are included.

The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The general winning hole sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning hole 10. The general winning hole sensor 10a is provided for each general winning hole 10. The gate sensor 13a is provided at the gate 13 and detects a game ball passing through the gate 13. The first big winning hole sensor 14a detects the game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 14. The second big winning hole sensor 15a detects the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15. The specific area sensor 16a detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16). The non-specific area sensor 17a detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17). When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal according to the detected content to the main control board 100.

Although not shown in FIG. 72, the various sensors MS include an outlet sensor that detects all the game balls (total number of fired balls) flowing down the game area 6. Here, the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area 6 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment through a discharge path (not shown) provided at the lower part of the game board mounting frame 2A. Therefore, the discharge port sensor is provided within the discharge path. Further, the various sensors MS include a magnetic sensor that detects illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects the magnetism generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally enter a game ball into the various winning holes 10, 11, 12, and 14. When each of the above-mentioned sensors detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content.

Further, the various sensors MS include a front door open sensor that detects opening of the front door 23 to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor that detects opening of the front frame 23m to the game board mounting frame 2A. . When the front door open sensor detects that the front door 23 is opened, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content. When the front frame sensor detects the opening of the front frame 23m, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content. Note that the type and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s, a first big winning hole solenoid 14s, a second big winning hole solenoid 15s, and a distribution solenoid 16s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The first big prize opening solenoid 14s drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first big winning device 14D. The second big prize opening solenoid 15s drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D. The distribution solenoid 16s drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D.

Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the main control board 100 is connected to displays 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for monitoring payout. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine of this embodiment and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card), and a prize ball payout device. 73 is connected, and a firing device 72 is also connected via a firing control circuit 175. Note that the firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 drives the prize ball motor 73m of the prize ball payout device 73 to pay out prize balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. , pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 73a for counting, and a detection signal by the prize ball sensor 73a is output to the payout control board 170.

Further, the firing device 72 is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect a contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k (see FIG. 1). When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170. Further, the firing device 72 is connected to a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing solenoid 72s so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, one game ball is shot every approximately 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the payout control board 170 is connected to the external terminal board 160. That is, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. The external terminal board 160 transmits an external terminal signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to an external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) provided outside the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. The information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information on the gaming status, and information indicating an error or fraud (abnormality). Although the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication, the outer end signal may be transmitted through asynchronous serial communication (common asynchronous serial communication port). Furthermore, although the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170, the main control board 100 may be connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the payout control board 170 (for example, a relay board). Alternatively, the main control board 100 and the external terminal board 160 may be directly connected.

<Display on 7-segment display>
Next, the display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 75) in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be explained. On the 7-segment display 300, the normal base, which is the ratio between the total number of normal prize balls won by the player in the normal gaming state and the normal number of balls fired by the player in the normal gaming state, is displayed as a percentage (%) value. Is displayed. Note that the 7-segment display 300 displays bases other than the normal base (time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in the time-saving state to the number of time-saving shot balls fired by the player in the time-saving state, and jackpot game). The jackpot base, which is the ratio between the total number of jackpot balls won by the player in the jackpot game state and the number of jackpot balls fired by the player in the jackpot game state, is never displayed.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to always count the number of normally fired balls, the total number of normally prized balls, and the total number of fired balls. The total number of balls fired is the number of balls fired by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). The total number of fired balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor. The number of normally fired balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor only in the normal game state. The total number of normal prize balls is calculated by counting the number of prize balls paid out by the game control microcomputer 101 in the normal gaming state.

The information on the number of normally fired balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300, the information on the total number of normally awarded balls, and the information on the total number of fired balls are stored in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104 (FIG. 72). (see) is stored in a specific storage area (not shown). Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of normally fired balls, the information on the total number of normally awarded balls, and the information on the total number of fired balls are maintained (not deleted). In this way, even if the RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base using the normal number of balls fired at the time of power cutoff and the normal total prize ball number at the time of power cutoff. The game control microcomputer 101 then displays the normal base value on the 7-segment display 300 regardless of the gaming state (in the normal gaming state, jackpot gaming state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). It is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 75)).

Here, the normal base is calculated by dividing the total number of fired balls into 60,000 rounds. In other words, the normal base calculated from when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory until the total number of fired balls reaches 60,000 becomes the first normal base. Thereafter, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 60,001 shots, the value that was the first normal base is stored as the previous normal base. The normal base calculated when the total number of fired balls increases from 60,001 to 120,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, if the total number of balls fired exceeds 120,001 shots, the value that was the normal base of the previous round will be stored as the normal base of the second round, and the value that was the current normal base will be stored as the normal base of the previous round. Ru. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 120,001 to 180,000 becomes the current normal base.

After that, if the total number of balls fired exceeds 180,001 shots, the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, and the value that was the normal base 1 time ago will be stored as the normal base 2 times ago. The value that was the current normal base is stored as the previous normal base. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 180,001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 240,001 shots, the value that was the normal base 3 times ago will be erased, the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, and the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, The value that was the normal base is stored as the normal base two times before, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one time ago. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 240,001 to 300,000 becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, the normal base is similarly calculated every 60,000 total shots, and the normal base values up to three times before are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the current normal base, the previous normal base, the second previous normal base, and the third previous normal base at the maximum in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104. You can leave it there. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the current normal base ⇒ 1 previous normal base ⇒ 2nd previous normal base, ⇒ 3rd previous normal base ⇒ current normal base 5 on the 7-segment display 300. The display is changed every second.

Specifically, in the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (first display area 310 and second display area 320 (see FIG. 75)), the right two digits (third display area 330 and a fourth display area 340), the current normal base is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value shown in the right two digits (normal base) is the current normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the current normal base display started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b1" in the left two digits, and displays the previous normal base in the right two digits. be done. Therefore, a person who sees "b1" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the previous normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the previous normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 will display "b2" in the left two digits, and the two previous normal base will be displayed in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b2" in the two digits on the left can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the two digits on the right is the normal base two times ago.

Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the display of the previous two normal bases started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b3" in the left two digits, and the three previous normal bases in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b3" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the normal base three times ago.

Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the normal base display three times before, on the 7-segment display 300, as described above, the left two digits indicate "bL" and the right two digits indicate the current state. The normal base of is displayed and the same is repeated thereafter.

Furthermore, in the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of balls fired is 300 balls or less after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "--" is displayed in the two digits on the right. That is, when the total number of fired balls is 300 balls or less, the normal base value is not displayed, and after the total number of fired balls exceeds 300 balls, the normal base value is displayed. In this way, if the total number of balls fired is 300 balls or less, the value of the denominator of the normal base (the number of balls normally fired) is too small, thereby avoiding displaying the unreliable value of the normal base. There is. In addition, even if the total number of fired balls is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 will repeat the display of "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every 5 seconds. .

In addition, on the 7-segment display 300, if the number of balls normally fired after the power is turned on for the first time after leaving the factory is 6000 balls or less, the two digits on the left will indicate "bL", "b1", "b2", "b3". ' will start blinking. Thereafter, when the number of normally fired balls exceeds 6000 balls after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3" indicated by the two digits on the left become lit. In this way, when the two digits on the left flash to a person who is checking the normal base on the 7-segment display 300, the normal base value shown on the two digits on the right has not yet converged sufficiently. It is possible to make the user understand that the value is not present. In other words, if you show the lighting mode in the two digits on the left to someone who is checking the normal base, they will understand that the normal base value shown in the two digits on the right is a value that has converged to some extent. It is possible to do so.

Further, in the 7-segment display 300, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the setting value (“1”) is displayed in the fourth display area 340. Thereafter, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode ends and the setting value (“1”) is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340. In this way, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the setting mode is set.

Further, in the 7-segment display 300, an initial display is performed after the power is turned on and before the normal base display starts. As described above, when transitioning to the setting mode after the power is turned on, the initial display is executed after the setting mode ends. In the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all the lighting parts LB1 to LB32 (see FIG. 75) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are lit. That is, "8.8.8.8." is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. In this way, the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on, thereby indicating that the 7-segment display 300 operates normally.

<Over-winning ball prevention function>
Next, the over-winning ball prevention function in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 is capable of operating an excessive prize ball prevention function so as not to award excessive prize balls to the player. Specifically, the over-prize ball prevention function is a function that makes the game unplayable on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 (standard number) or more. Here, the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. The total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player obtains (is paid out to the player) in all gaming states (normal playing state, jackpot playing state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.) It is. Note that the total number of prize balls means the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to pay out to the player, but does not mean the total number of prize balls that are actually paid out to the player. It's okay. As mentioned above, the total number of balls fired is the number of balls fired by the player in all game states.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. It is stored in the total prize pitch number storage unit 107a (see FIG. 72). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of fired balls at any time after the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the gaming RAM 104. The total number of balls fired is stored in the storage unit 107b (see FIG. 72). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of balls fired from the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the calculated difference number of balls is The difference ball number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 72) provided in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the RAM 104 is stored.

Therefore, even if RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of prize balls, the information on the total number of fired balls, and the information on the number of difference balls stored in the non-erasable storage section 107. . In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the difference in the number of balls across dates using the total number of prize balls at the time of power cutoff and the total number of fired balls at the time of power cutoff. Note that the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to treat the difference number of balls as a negative value when the value of the total number of balls fired is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108 described later, see FIG. 82), but also fires the game ball. The firing control process (the process of step S109 described later, see FIG. 82) for the purpose of this is also stopped. Therefore, even if the player rotates the handle 72k, the game ball is not shot, and the player can immediately notice that the game cannot be played. In addition, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and stops receiving signals according to the detection contents from the various sensors MS, and the display devices 8 and 7 segments The display control of the display 300 is no longer executed, the various actuators MA are no longer operated, and the outer end signal is no longer output to the external terminal board 160 via the dispensing control board 170.

After the over-winning ball prevention function is activated, the situation in which the game cannot be executed continues until the power is cut off. In this embodiment, the excessive prize ball prevention function is canceled on the condition that RAM clearing is executed. That is, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the employee of the gaming hall turns off the power by turning off the power switch 191. Then, when turning on the power by turning on the power switch 191, the employee of the game parlor depresses the RAM clear switch 119. Thereby, by executing RAM clear, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control process and firing control process regarding the game. In this way, in this embodiment, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game cannot be restarted simply by turning the power off and on (re-on), but the game can be restarted only by clearing the RAM. can.

Next, the timing at which the excessive prize ball prevention function operates will be explained based on FIG. 76. The over-prize ball prevention function is activated when the player shifts from an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player to a normal gaming state on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. In other words, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not necessarily operate at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000. In this embodiment, the advantageous gaming state is a high probability high base state after a jackpot game or a low probability high base state after a jackpot game.

For example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 76(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 76(B). At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not operate. Subsequently, even at the timing of transition from this jackpot game state to the high-accuracy, high-base state, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(C), at the timing of transition from the high-accuracy, high-base state to the normal gaming state, the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, the game does not stop in the middle of the jackpot game state or the high probability high base state, and the game can be ended at a good timing when the advantageous game state ends for the player. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the information on the difference number of balls is stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107, and the difference number of balls is not reset (cleared) by turning the power off and on. As described above, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the difference in the number of balls will not be reset. This is based on the following reasons.

In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, even during business hours, there are situations where the power is turned off and turned on (re-on) or the RAM is cleared due to bugs, breakdowns, severe fraud, etc. In such a situation, if the difference in the number of balls is reset by turning on the power again or clearing the RAM, the purpose of providing the over-prize ball prevention function will be lost. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or severe fraud occurs, there is a risk that the player who restarts the game afterward will be given an unfair advantage by making it difficult for the over-prize ball prevention function to operate. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the above-mentioned unfair advantage from being given to the player, the difference number of balls is not reset by turning the power back on or executing RAM clearing.

Next, the conditions under which the difference number of balls is reset will be explained based on FIG. 77. In this embodiment, there are two reset conditions for resetting the difference number of balls. The first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 is pressed down, as shown in FIG. 77(A). In other words, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181, it clears the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107. do. Note that when the information on the number of differential balls stored in the differential ball number storage section 107c is reset (cleared), the information on the total number of award balls and the total number of balls stored in the total number of award balls storage section 107a are also reset (cleared). The information on the total number of fired balls stored in the fired ball number storage unit 107b is also reset, but hereinafter this will simply be referred to as "the difference number of balls is reset (cleared)". In addition, although FIG. 77(A) shows a case where the number of differential balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed while waiting for a customer, it does not matter in which gaming state (for example, normal gaming state). However, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, the difference number of balls is reset.

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in FIG. 77(A). In other words, if the game is not played for an hour after entering the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 will delete the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107. clear. Note that the customer waiting state is a gaming state in which no game is executed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are provided for the following reasons. For example, as shown in FIGS. 77(A) and 77(B), assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in a jackpot game state due to a game played by a certain player. Thereafter, when a certain player transitions from the jackpot gaming state to the high-probability-high-base state and then to the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the game has ended. In this case, for the player who starts the next game, if the number of difference balls increases by a small amount (within 10,000), the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated, which is extremely disadvantageous.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the number of differential balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. Thereby, an employee of the gaming parlor can press the special reset switch 181 at any timing after a certain player finishes playing the game to reset the number of difference balls. Further, as shown in FIG. 77(B), if the customer waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished the game, and the difference in the number of balls is automatically reset. Thereby, the difference in the number of balls can be reset without placing a burden on the employees of the game parlor. In this way, by providing the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the next player who starts the game from having the excessive prize ball prevention function activated immediately after starting the game, which would put him at a huge disadvantage. It is possible.

Next, the performance mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated will be explained based on FIG. 78(A). When the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a red background image RE is displayed on the display unit 50a, and "Error X Over prize ball abnormality Please clear RAM" An error cancellation method image ERX showing the error is displayed. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. In this way, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 78(A) makes it possible for the player to immediately recognize the situation in which the game cannot be played. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 78(A) continues until the power is cut off. The effect mode shown in FIG. 78(A) is canceled when RAM clear is executed, but it continues as it is only by turning the power back on.

Here, a case will be described in which an illegal magnetism is detected in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal according to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and the firing control process related to the game, similarly to when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, the situation in which the game cannot be executed due to magnetic detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike the case where the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 executes game control processing and firing control processing regarding the game by turning the power off and on (returning the power on). can do.

Next, the presentation mode when illegal magnetism is detected will be explained based on FIG. 78(B). When an incorrect magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, a red background image RE is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. An error release method image ER1 indicating "Please do so" is displayed. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. In this way, when comparing the performance mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (see Figure 78 (A)) and the performance mode when illegal magnetism is detected (see Figure 78 (B)), the cancellation method Everything other than the image is the same. Therefore, it is necessary to make employees or players at the gaming parlor aware that they are in a situation where they cannot play the game both when illegal magnetism is detected and when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. It is possible to make it easier.

Next, the performance mode when the difference number of balls reaches 70,000 will be explained based on FIG. 79(A). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 77(A). First, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a round image G109 and a prize ball number image G110 are displayed on the display section 50a. Then, when the difference number of balls reaches 70,000, a purple border image EFa is displayed on the edge of the display section 50a, and an over-prize image EFa is displayed at the bottom of the display section 50a, indicating "over-prize ball abnormality with 10,000 shots left". A ball preview image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple border image EFa and the over-prized ball preview image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation where the over-prized ball prevention function is about to be activated. The display of the purple border image EFa continues even after the jackpot game state ends, but the display of the super prize ball preview image KY ends when the jackpot game state ends. Note that the over-prize ball preview image KY may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Next, the presentation mode when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 will be explained based on FIG. 79(B). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 77(B). As shown in FIG. 79(B), a round image G109 and a prize ball number image G110 are displayed on the display unit 50a. When the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000, a red border image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a, and a game stop notice image KH indicating that the game will be stopped when the rush ends is displayed at the bottom of the display section 50a. is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to know that the game stop is approaching and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb continues even after the jackpot gaming state ends, but the display of the game stop notice image KH ends when the jackpot gaming state ends. Note that the game stop notice image KH may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Here, after the number of differential balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 77(A), the presentation mode in the high-accuracy-high base state is as shown in FIG. 80(A). That is, as shown in FIG. 80(A), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This purple border image EFa allows the player to play the game while being aware that the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000.

Further, after the difference number of balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 77(B), the effect mode in the high-accuracy-high base state is as shown in FIG. 80(B). That is, as shown in FIG. 80(B), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This red edge image EFb allows the player to play the game while being aware that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a description will be given of the presentation mode when the difference number of balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. In this case, an employee of the game center has opened the front door 23 to the outer frame 22 and has pressed the special reset switch 181. Therefore, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and as shown in FIG. is displayed. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed at the lower part of the display section 50a. This makes it possible for employees at the gaming parlor to know that the difference in the number of balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a performance mode when the customer waiting state continues for one hour will be described. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display section 50a. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed at the lower part of the display section 50a. This makes it possible for employees at the gaming parlor to know that the difference in the number of balls has been reset.

<Operation of the game control microcomputer in the second embodiment>
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 in the second embodiment will be explained. Note that counters, timers, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101, which will be explained below, are provided in the game RAM 104.

[Main control main processing] In the power-on processing (S001) of the second embodiment, the gaming control microcomputer 101 executes RAM clearing when a signal based on a pressing operation to the RAM clearing switch 119 is input. When RAM clearing is executed, gaming information (for example, information on gaming states such as high probability states, information on the number of reserved special drawings, jackpot determination results, etc.) stored in the gaming RAM 104 is erased. As a result, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state, low probability non time saving state). However, even if the RAM clear is executed, the information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and the information on the difference balls The information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the number storage unit 107c is not cleared.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] The main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) in the second embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIG. 82, in the main side timer interrupt process (S005), it is first determined whether the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned ON when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing in steps S102 to S113 is passed. This makes the game unplayable. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), the processes of steps S102 to S113 are executed. In other words, the game is ready for play.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001) of the main control main process (FIG. 23) of the second embodiment, when the RAM clear is executed while the game stop flag is ON, it is switched OFF. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed while the game stop flag is ON, it remains ON. In other words, the state of the game stop flag does not change just by turning the power back on. In this way, after the game stop flag is turned ON due to the operation of the excessive prize ball prevention function, whether or not the game is restarted is determined depending on whether or not RAM clear is executed.

If the game stop flag is OFF in step S101, an input process (S102) to be described later is executed. Then, after performing normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S103) for updating various random numbers, sensor detection processing (S104), and normal operation processing related to the operation of the electric chew 12D (S105), the difference number of balls described later is performed. Measurement processing (S106) and special operation processing (S107) to be described later are executed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a sorting device control process (S108) for controlling the sorting device 16D, and executes a firing control process (S109) for controlling the firing of game balls. Note that the distribution device 16D is operated when a special game using the second big prize winning device 15D is performed. Further, by executing the firing control process (S109), the player can fire the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the firing control process (S109) is not executed, the game ball cannot be fired even if the player rotates the handle 72k.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process (S110) for controlling the display on the 7-segment display 300. Next, error processing (S111) is executed to determine an error due to magnetic detection (fraud), an error due to opening of the front door 23 or the front frame 23m, and the like. In the error process (S111), it is determined whether or not illegal magnetism has been detected by the magnetic sensor. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing. In the error process (S111), the front door open sensor or the front frame sensor determines whether the front door 23 or the front frame 23m is open. Then, a frame opening command is generated according to the result of the processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs an output process (S112), which will be described later, and executes other processes (S113). Other processing (S113) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S113), a payout control process for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170 in response to winning of game balls to each winning hole. That is, the payout control board 170 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball request signal. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a power-off monitoring process (S114) when the power is cut off, and ends this process. In the power outage monitoring process (S114), when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply will be cut off due to a drop in the monitoring voltage, it displays game information, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and number of differential balls. information, game stop flag information, etc. are stored in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 104. Thereafter, access to the gaming RAM 104 is prohibited.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 83, in the input processing (S102), it is first determined whether the special reset switch 181 is ON, that is, whether a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181 has been received. (S201). If it is not ON (NO in S201), the process advances to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erasing clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erasing clearing process (S202), information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and number of difference balls. The information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared. Note that even if the non-erasing clearing process (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in a specific storage area (not shown) of the non-erasing storage unit 107 is not cleared. This is because the information on the total number of fired balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300, as described above.

Following step S202, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. In this way, when the non-erasing clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the difference ball count reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 81(A). In step S204, other processing is executed and the present processing ends. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the lower tray 35 is full, and stores it in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 as lower tray full data. .

[Sensor detection processing] In the sensor detection processing (S104), general winning hole sensor processing, gate sensor processing, second starting hole sensor processing, first starting hole sensor processing, first big winning hole sensor processing, second big winning hole Sensor processing, specific area sensor processing, and discharge port sensor processing are performed in sequence. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

In the general winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the general winning hole sensor 10a. In addition, a command for the general winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the regular symbol retention storage section 106 provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the common symbol reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random number is not stored. Furthermore, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 2-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 2-related random number is is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 2 related random number is The area is stored in order. In addition, when the special figure 2 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 2 related random number is not stored. Further, a second pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 2 related random number and the second pre-reading determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 2 pending number command representing the number of special figure 2 related random numbers (special figure 2 pending number) stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b and a second look-ahead judgment are executed. A second starting port sensor command including a second starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 1-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 1-related random number is is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 1 related random number is The area is stored in order. In addition, when the special figure 1 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 1 related random number is not stored. Moreover, the first pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 related random number and the first pre-reading determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 1 pending number command representing the number of special figure 1 related random numbers (special figure 1 pending number) stored in the special figure 1 pending storage unit 105a and a first look-ahead judgment are executed. A command for the first starting port sensor including a first starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 14a. In addition, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. In addition, a command for the second big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a. Further, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the discharge port sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the discharge port sensor.

[Difference ball number measurement process] As shown in FIG. 84, in the difference ball number measurement process (S106), first, a total prize ball count process is executed to count the total number of prize balls paid out to the player (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage section 107a (see FIG. 72). Next, a total number of fired balls counting process is executed to count the total number of fired balls based on the detection by the discharge port sensor (S302). Information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the total number of fired balls storage section 107b (see FIG. 72). Then, the difference ball number calculation process is executed to calculate the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls (S303). Information on the calculated difference number of balls is stored in the difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 72).

Subsequently, in step S304, it is determined whether the over-prize ball notice flag is OFF. The over-prized ball notice flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), the process advances to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70,000 (NO in S305), the process advances to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70,000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notification flag is turned on (S306), and the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. As a result, when the super-prize ball preview command is sent to the sub-control board 120, the purple border image EFa and the super-prize ball preview image KY are displayed on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 79(A). .

Subsequently, in step S308, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is OFF. The over-prize ball flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (S309). If it is less than 80,000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80,000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize ball flag is turned ON (S310). Then, an over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S311), and this process is finished. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is sent to the sub-control board 120, the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH are displayed on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 79(B).

[Special operation processing] As shown in FIG. 85, in the special operation processing (S107), the processing regarding the special figure display 81 and the grand prize winning device (first grand prize device 14D, second grand prize winning device 15D) is divided into four stages. "Special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. Then, if the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a special symbol standby including processing such as determining a jackpot and starting a variable display of the special symbol. Processing (S1302) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "2" (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304) includes processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol. is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "3" (NO in S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305), special symbol confirmation processing (S1306) including processing such as shifting the gaming state is performed, When the "special operation status" is "4" (all of S1301, S1303, and S1305 are NO), special electric accessory processing (S1307) including processing such as opening the big prize opening is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process] As shown in FIG. 86, in the special symbol standby process (S1302), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls) is "0" or not. is determined (S1401). When the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is "0" (S1401 YES), that is, when there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the second starting opening 12, the first starting opening 11 It is determined whether the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of reserved balls for special figure 1) is "0" (S1407). If the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is also "0" (YES in S1407), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the first starting slot 11, the customer It is determined whether the wait flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates that the vehicle is in a customer waiting state. If it is ON (YES in S1416), a customer waiting measurement process to be described later is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO in S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1417), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1418), and this process ends.

If the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is not "0" in step S1401 (NO in S1401), that is, the memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the second starting hole 12 (reservation information of special drawing 2 ), when there is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1403) are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 by 1 (S1404). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b is shifted one place from the current position to the side where it is read out, and it corresponds to the first reservation in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b. Clear the storage area to be stored (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 variation start process (S1406), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 to start variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, the variation start command (also referred to as the special pattern 2 variation start command) set in the special pattern 2 variation start process (S1406) includes the special pattern stop symbol data set in the special pattern 2 jackpot determination process (S1402). Information and information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) (information including information on variation time) are included.

Also, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), that is, there is no reservation information for special drawing 2, but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0". If there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the 1 starting opening 11 (pending information of the special figure 1), the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) and the special figure 1 variation are performed. Pattern selection processing (S1409) is performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a is shifted one place from the current position to the side where it is read out, and it corresponds to the fourth reservation in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a. (S1411) In this way, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 to start the variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation start command (also referred to as the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412) includes the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408). Information and information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) (information including information on variation time) are included.

Proceeding to step S1413, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clearing process is executed to clear (reset) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" (S1415), and this process ends. The customer waiting counter is provided in the gaming RAM 104 and is used to measure the time that the customer waiting state continues. Note that the value of the customer waiting counter is cleared by turning on the power again, regardless of whether RAM clearing is executed or not.

[Customer waiting measurement process] As shown in FIG. 87, in the customer waiting measurement process (S1419), first, a customer waiting counter increasing process is executed to increase the value of the customer waiting counter (S1420). Thereby, the game control microcomputer 101 can grasp the duration of the customer waiting state based on the value of the customer waiting counter. Next, it is determined whether the customer waiting state continues for more than one hour. If it is determined that the process is not continuing (NO in S1421), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process continues (S1421: YES), a non-erasing clear process is executed (S1422), similar to the process of step S202 described above (see FIG. 82). As a result, information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c are stored. The information on the number of balls that are currently in play will be cleared.

Subsequently, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1423), and this processing is completed. In this way, when the non-erasing clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the difference ball count reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 81(B).

[Special symbol confirmation process] As shown in FIG. 88, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1306), first, the stop time of the special symbol (the stop time determined according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1901). If the time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), this process ends immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbol is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a game state management process to be described later is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (S1903: YES), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the opening pattern (setting of data according to the opening pattern) may be performed for each round.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a game state reset process following step S1904 (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the control is performed in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). Then, the special operation status is set to "4" (S1908), and this processing ends.

Further, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the special operation status is set to "1" (S1909) to end the process because the jackpot game is not started.

[Game State Management Process] As shown in FIG. 89, in the game state management process (S1902), first, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON or not (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state is decreased by 1 (S2002), and the value of the probability variation counter is checked whether it is "0" or not. It is determined (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2004), and the process advances to step S2005. If the determination result in step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately advances to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON. If it is ON (S2005 YES), the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state is decreased by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter is "0" or not ( S2007). If it is "0" (YES in S2007), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2008) and the process advances to step S2009. If the determination result in step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process advances to step S2012.

In step S2009, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2009), the process advances to step S2012. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2009), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2010) and the process proceeds to step S2011. In this way, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high probability high base state or the low probability low base state ends, the game becomes impossible to execute.

In step S2011, a game stop notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S2012. As a result, when the game stop notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 78(A). Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off.

In step S2012, a gaming state designation command including information on the current gaming state (information on whether the probability change flag and time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the probability variation counter, the value of the time saving counter, etc. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 104, and this processing is completed.

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 90, in the output processing (S112), outer end signal output processing to be described later is executed (S3001). Subsequently, as other output processing (S3002), the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in each of the above-mentioned processing are outputted to the sub control board 120 and the payout control board 170, and this processing ends.

[Outer edge signal output processing] As shown in FIG. 91, in the outer edge signal output processing (S3001), it is determined whether the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (S3101). In other words, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notification flag is not ON (NO in S3101), the process advances to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (YES in S3101), the outer end signal output process for over-prize ball notice is executed (S3102), and the process advances to step S3102. In the outer edge signal output process for super prize ball notice (S3102), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 70,000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer edge signal for super prize ball notice") is output to the main control board 100. The information is sent to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal for announcing the winning ball to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) by parallel communication. As a result, the employees of the gaming hall who are monitoring the hall computer are informed of the situation in which the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated if the number of differential balls increases (within 10,000) in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. It is possible to make them understand.

In step S3103, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the process advances to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), the outer end signal output process for over-prize balls is executed (S3104), and the process advances to step S3105. In the outer end signal output process for super prize balls (S3104), an outer end signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 80,000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer end signal for super prize balls") is output from the main control board 100. It is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal for super prize ball preview to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the gaming parlor who is monitoring the hall computer will notice that the difference in the number of balls in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment has reached 80,000 and that the high-accuracy, high-base state or low-accuracy, low-base state has ended. It is possible to grasp the situation in which the game becomes impossible to play.

In step S3105, it is determined whether the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game is no longer playable. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S3105), the process advances to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (S3105: YES), a game stop outer end signal output process is executed (S3106), and the process advances to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output process (S3106), the outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as the "game stop outer end signal") indicating that the game is no longer playable due to the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is It is transmitted from the control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. As a result, the external terminal board 160 transmits the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employees of the gaming parlor who are monitoring the hall computer to understand the situation where the game is no longer playable due to the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. .

In step S3107, it is determined whether the non-erasure clearing process shown in step S203 or the non-erasing clearing process shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and information on the total number of fired balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c. It is determined whether or not the information on the number of differential balls present has been cleared. If the non-erasure clearing process is not being executed (NO in S3107), the process advances to step S3109. On the other hand, if the non-erasing clear process is being executed (YES in S3107), the reset outer end signal output process is executed (S3108), and the process advances to step S3109. In the reset outer edge signal output process (S3108), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of difference balls has been reset (hereinafter referred to as "reset outer edge signal") is transmitted from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. and is transmitted to the external terminal board 160. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the reset outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for an employee of the gaming parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to understand the situation in which the number of differential balls has been reset in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. In addition, a dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and through this dedicated signal line, an outer end signal for super prize ball notice, an outer end signal for super prize ball, and an outer end signal for stopping the game are transmitted. , a reset outer end signal is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170.

<Actions and effects of the second embodiment>
As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high probability high base state or the low probability low base state ends, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the jackpot game state, the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state, and there is no particular disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, which allows the player to stop playing at a timing when it is easy to stop playing, and which does not award excessive prize balls.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) ends, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game before the situation where the number of balls in possession decreases after the high base state ends. In other words, after transitioning from the high base state to the normal game state, the total number of fired balls increases, and a situation where the difference in number of balls becomes less than 80,000 can be assumed. Therefore, in order to prevent the above situation from occurring, it is possible to stop the game at the timing when the high base state ends.

By the way, if a certain player stops playing before the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000, and a player who plays the game later starts playing immediately, if the difference in number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, a serious problem occurs. A situation arises. Therefore, according to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the measured number of differential balls is reset based on the establishment of a reset condition that is not triggered by turning on the power. Specifically, the difference number of balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed or when the customer waiting state continues for one hour. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player who played a game later from stopping the game immediately after starting the game, and it is possible to prevent a serious situation from occurring.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when an employee of the game parlor presses down the RAM clear switch 119 when turning on the power, game information (for example, information on the game state such as a high probability state, information on special drawings on hold, etc.) information such as the number of winnings and the jackpot determination result), but the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage unit 107c is not deleted. Therefore, even in a situation where game information must be deleted due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible to prevent the measured number of difference balls from being deleted.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, as described above, even if RAM clearing is executed, the measured difference number of balls is not erased. However, by pressing the special reset switch 181 by an employee of the gaming hall, the measured number of difference balls can be erased. In this way, an employee of the gaming hall can erase the measured difference in the number of balls at any timing.

<Example of modification of second embodiment>
Modifications of the second embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modification of the second embodiment, the same components as the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples of the second embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Furthermore, technical features in the second embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. Further, the configuration included in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above and the configuration included in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment described above may be used in the second embodiment and its components to the extent that they do not interfere with the game. It can be adopted in a gaming machine as understood from the modification example.

In the second embodiment, it is configured as a so-called V-probability machine (a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state based on the passage of a game ball to the specific area 16 (V area)), but based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol. It may also be configured as a gaming machine in which transition to a high probability state is determined by In addition, in the second embodiment, it is configured as a so-called ST machine (a gaming machine in which a high probability state ends according to the number of changes in special symbols), but once it is controlled to a high probability state, the high probability continues until the start of the next jackpot game. It may be configured as a gaming machine in which control to a probability state continues (a so-called variable loop type machine) or a falling machine (a gaming machine in which a high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). Furthermore, the present invention may be configured as a gaming machine that executes a small winning game in which the large prize opening is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds when a small winning is won in a special symbol lottery. In this case, it may be configured as a gaming machine in which a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed when a game ball that enters the jackpot due to execution of the small jackpot passes through a specific area in the jackpot. . Then, if you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed, and when the game ball passes through a specific area in the jackpot, a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed. It may be configured as a type 2 jackpot game.

In the second embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the transition is from a high probability high base state (advantageous gaming state) to a normal gaming state (see FIG. 76) or a low probability high base state (advantageous gaming state) ) When transitioning to the normal gaming state, the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. However, the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated not only when the advantageous gaming state is transferred to the normal gaming state, but also when the advantageous gaming state ends. For example, when transitioning from a high-accuracy, high-base state (advantageous gaming state) to a low-accuracy, high-base state, or from a high-accuracy, high-base state to a high-accuracy, low-base state, the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. You can also do it.

For example, as shown in FIG. 92, when transitioning from the high-probability-high base state to the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the maximum number of reserved special drawings 2 is 4 (predetermined number). It is assumed that the special drawing 2 drawing is executed with priority over the special drawing 1 drawing, and is set to be more advantageous to the player than the special drawing 1 drawing. In this case, when the state shifts from the high probability/high base state to the normal gaming state, the lottery of the special drawing 2 will be executed four times, and it can be said that the state is still advantageous for the player. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that the game is in an advantageous gaming state until all of the remaining special drawing 2 reservations (special drawing 2 remaining reservations) are used up when the state shifts to the normal gaming state. Then, when all the remaining special symbols 2 are used up (when the variable display and stop display of the 2nd special symbol based on the remaining 2 special symbols are all finished), the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (game (see FIG. 92). In addition, the drawing for special drawing 1 may be executed with priority over the drawing for special drawing 2, or the drawing for special drawing 1 may be executed in priority order than the drawing for special drawing 2. A lottery or a special drawing 2 lottery may be executed.

In particular, if it is a 1st and 2nd type mixing machine and you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery, the 2nd type jackpot game will virtually always be executed (the game ball can pass through a specific area). In this case, as shown in FIG. 92, it is preferable that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated when all the remaining special drawings 2 are used up in the normal gaming state. This is because even if the state shifts from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal game state, the type 2 jackpot game is very likely to be executed until all of the remaining reserved special symbols 2 are used up. That is, if the game becomes impossible to execute due to the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function at the timing when the high base state ends, the chance to win the type 2 jackpot game will be lost, which will be bad for the player. Note that the upper limit number of special drawings 2 reserved is not limited to four, but may be one, for example, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the second embodiment, the timing at which the over-prize ball prevention function is activated is when the high-accuracy high-base state ends or when the low-accuracy high-base state ends. However, the over-winning ball prevention function may be activated only when the high-accuracy, high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop the game only when the so-called "rush state (consecutive game period)" ends. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference in number of balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the customer waiting state, or at the timing when the customer waiting state continues for a certain fixed period of time. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference number of balls is 80,000 or more and the jackpot game state ends. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more.

In the second embodiment, the first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed (see FIG. 77(A)), or the first reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time). When the second reset condition (see FIG. 77(B)) is satisfied, the difference number of balls is reset (erased). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated at the timing when the jackpot game state ends or when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, as shown in FIG. The difference in the number of balls may be reset when transitioning from the high probability base state (advantageous gaming state) to the normal gaming state. In this case, the difference in number of balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (consecutive play period)" ends, so only if the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 (standard number) during one rush state. , it is possible to activate the over-prize ball prevention function. In addition to the high-accuracy, high-base state and the low-accuracy, high-base state, the number of differential balls may be reset when transitioning from an advantageous gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state or a high-accuracy, low-base state to a normal gaming state. . Further, the number of differential balls may be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 119 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180.

For example, as shown in FIG. 93(B), when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour), the difference number of balls may be reset. In this case, if the normal gaming state continues for a specific period of time (for example, one hour), it means that the situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the difference number of balls, it is possible to prevent the difference number of balls from exceeding 80,000 for a while. Note that the above-mentioned specific time is not limited to one hour, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a specific number in the normal game state, the number of difference balls may be reset. Further, for example, the difference in the number of balls may be reset by turning the power off and on (turning the power back on).

For example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9 am), the difference number of balls may be reset. In this case, it is possible to automatically eliminate the difference in the number of balls without forcing the employees of the gaming hall to perform any operations. Note that the reference time described above is not limited to 9:00 a.m., and can be changed as appropriate.

In the second embodiment, a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) for resetting the number of differential balls is arranged on the main control board 100 (see FIG. 74). However, if a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference number of balls can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be arranged, for example, on the payout control board 170 or on a dedicated board.

In the second embodiment, the measured difference number of balls was not displayed on the display means. However, the measured difference number of balls may be displayed on the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured number of difference balls on the display 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 75). In this case, for example, when the number of differential balls is 0 to 50,000 (first range), the first mode is displayed on the display 8 or the 7-segment display 300, and the number of differential balls is 50,001 to 70,000. (second range), the second mode is displayed on the display 8 or the 7-segment display 300, and when the difference in the number of balls is between 70,001 and 80,000 (third range), the second mode is displayed. The third aspect may be displayed on the appliance 8 or 7 segment display 300. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of differential balls (or information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls) to the sub-control board 120, and the production control microcomputer 121 displays the image. The difference in the number of balls may be displayed on a display means such as the device 50. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of prize balls that have been paid out (or the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be paid out) and information on detection by the discharge port sensor to the sub-control board 120. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 may calculate the difference number of balls based on this information, and thereby display the difference number of balls on a display means such as the image display device 50.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the number of difference balls on the 7-segment display 300, as in a modification shown in FIG. That is, in this modification, the information on the difference number of balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections), and is stored in the four storage areas of the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107, respectively. . The first storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on this time to the present time. The second storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on last time (one time before) until when the power was turned off last time. The third storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before (two times ago) until when the power was turned off two times before. The 4th (N)th storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two previous times (three times ago) to when the power was turned off two previous times. In this way, each time the power is turned off and on, the measured difference in the number of balls is shifted and stored, and the difference in the number of balls stored in the fourth storage area is erased. Note that the information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the first to fourth storage areas is not erased even if RAM clear is executed.

In this modification, the number of difference balls stored in the first storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the second storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the third storage area, 4 The difference number of balls stored in the second storage area is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300, switching sequentially in units of 1,000 balls. Ru. Specifically, on the 7-segment display 300, as shown in FIG. 94(A), for example, "bL36" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), for example, "b134" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the previous normal base was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), for example, "b238" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base two times ago was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(D), for example, "b235" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base three times ago was 38%.

Subsequently, on the 7-segment display 300, as shown in FIG. 94(E), for example, "cL20" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on this time to the present time is 20,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(F), for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the difference in the number of balls between when the power was turned on last time (one time before) and when the power was turned off last time is "0". Note that if the total number of fired balls is greater than the total number of prized balls and the difference in the number of balls is smaller than "0", "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(G), for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on the second time before (two times ago) to when the power was turned off the second time before the previous time was 65,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before last (three times ago) to when the power was turned off two times before last was 48,000. Thereafter, FIGS. 94(A) to 94(H) are repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds.

In the above-mentioned modification, each time the power is turned OFF and ON (re-energized), the measured difference number of balls is shifted and stored, and the difference number of balls stored in the 4th (N)th storage area is is now deleted. However, each time RAM clearing is executed, the measured difference number of balls may be shifted and stored, and the difference number of balls stored in the 4th (N)th storage area may be deleted. . Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer determines that it is a predetermined time (for example, 9 a.m.), the measured difference number of balls is shifted and stored in the 4th (N) storage area. The difference in the number of balls may be deleted. Note that N described above can be changed as appropriate as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more.

In the above-mentioned modification, as shown in FIG. 94, the display of the difference number of balls was automatically switched every 5 seconds on the 7-segment display 300. However, the display of the difference number of balls may be changed by operating a predetermined operation means, such as pressing the RAM clear switch 119 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180. Further, the display of the normal base and the display of the difference number of balls may be switched by operating a predetermined operating means.

In the second embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 70,000 (predetermined number), the performance mode shown in FIG. 79(A) indicates that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation. However, the presentation mode indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 79(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The difference in number of balls is 70,000") or a special light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the panel lamp 54 or the frame lamp 53 indicates that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation. It may also be shown as follows. Furthermore, as the number of differential balls increases, it may be shown that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation by a presentation mode that changes in multiple stages.

In the second embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 (reference number), a situation is shown in which the game may be stopped by the performance mode shown in FIG. 79(B). However, the presentation mode indicating a situation where the game may be stopped is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 79(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a situation in which the game may be stopped may be indicated by a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The difference in number of balls is 80,000") or by a special light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the board lamp 54 or the frame lamp 53. good.

In the second embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the performance mode shown in FIG. 78(A) shows a situation in which the game cannot be executed. However, the presentation mode indicating a situation in which a game cannot be performed is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 78(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image indicating "The game cannot be played" may be displayed on the display unit 50a, or a special sound (for example, "The game cannot be played") may be output from the speaker 52.

In the second embodiment, even if RAM clearing is executed, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the difference number of balls storage section 107c is not deleted. However, even if the information on the difference number of balls is stored in a predetermined storage area (erase storage section) of the gaming RAM 104, and when the RAM clear is executed, the information on the difference number of balls is cleared. good. In other words, the conditions for resetting the difference number of balls include that RAM clearing is executed, or the reset condition for resetting the difference number of balls is only that RAM clearing is executed. Also good.

In the second embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108, see FIG. 82), but also fires the game ball. The firing control process (processing in step S109, see FIG. 82) for the purpose of this is also stopped. However, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control process, but may not stop the firing control process. However, in this case, even if the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game ball flows down the game area 6 by the player's rotation operation on the handle 72k. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the firing control process, it is possible for the player to quickly understand the situation in which the game cannot be executed. For example, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the firing control process, but may not stop the game control process. However, in this case, at the timing when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game ball may still be flowing down the game area 6, and the game ball may enter the various prize openings and award the player a prize. There is a problem that balls can be applied. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the firing control process, it is possible to ensure that prize balls are not awarded to the player after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated.

In the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of fired balls based on the detection of the discharge port sensor. However, based on the detection of the sensors that detect winnings in various winning holes (first starting hole sensor, second starting hole sensor, general winning hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a), , the total number of balls fired may be counted. Alternatively, if a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end of the inner wall portion 1B, and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention portion, the total The number of balls fired may be counted.

In the second embodiment, when the number of differential balls reaches 70,000, the over-prized ball preview image KY is displayed as shown in FIG. 79(A). However, regardless of the difference in the number of balls, the game becomes unplayable under the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more in customer waiting performances, performances during jackpot games (e.g. ending performances), preview performances accompanying variable performances, etc. You may perform a performance that explains what will happen. This is because such an effect allows players and employees of the gaming parlor to be informed in advance that the pachinko gaming machine has a function to prevent over-winning balls.

In the second embodiment, by storing information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of difference balls in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104, even if the RAM is cleared, The information on the total number of prize balls, the total number of fired balls, and the number of differential balls was prevented from being deleted. However, by storing information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of differential balls in a nonvolatile storage means (for example, FRAM (registered trademark)) provided separately from the gaming RAM 104, Even if RAM clearing is executed, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of difference balls may not be deleted.

In the second embodiment, the number of difference balls is counted at any time after the power is turned on. However, the counting of the difference number of balls may start from the so-called first win (winning the jackpot in the normal gaming state). In this case, the negative difference in the number of balls (that is, the total number of balls fired) from when the power is turned on until the first hit is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference in the number of balls that triggers the over-winning ball prevention function to be the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates the difference in the number of balls by separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls, and subtracting the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls. . However, the number of difference balls may be measured (counted) using only the difference ball counter for counting the number of difference balls. That is, each time there is a prize ball, the value of the prize ball is added to the difference ball counter. Furthermore, each time a game ball is fired (every time the discharge port sensor detects the ball), the value of the difference ball counter is subtracted. In this way, the number of differential balls may be measured without separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. In this case, the value of the difference ball counter may be set to always be "0" or more without becoming negative. In this way, as described above, the difference in the number of balls that triggers the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function can be made substantially the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the second embodiment, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated on the condition that the difference ball number (specific measurement number) is 80,000 (standard number) or more. However, the number of difference balls (reference number) that is the standard for the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is not limited to 80,000, but may be 50,000, 100,000, or 120,000, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the second embodiment, the specific measurement number that triggers the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is the difference number of balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. However, from the viewpoint of not awarding excessive prize balls, the specific measurement number can be changed as appropriate as long as it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player. For example, the specific measured number may be the number of differential balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state or a certain period such as a consecutive game period. For example, the specific measurement number is the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period. It's okay. Further, for example, the specific measurement number may be based on all gaming states, limited to a certain gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, or limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period.

In the second embodiment, the pachinko game machine is configured as a non-enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls housed inside flow down the game area 6 and then are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine. However, the pachinko game machine may be configured as an enclosed pachinko machine in which game balls housed inside the machine can circulate and enter the game area again after flowing down the game area. In this case, a 7-segment display is arranged on a frame control board corresponding to the payout control board 170. Therefore, it may be possible to display the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) on this 7-segment display. There is also a 6-digit, 7-segment display at the bottom of the front door that displays the number of balls you have. Therefore, the number of difference balls (specific measurement number) may be displayed on this 6-digit 7-segment display. Note that "measurement" in this embodiment has the same meaning as counting or counting.

<Invention shown in second embodiment>
In the above-described second embodiment and its modification example, inventions of the following means are shown. In the explanation of the means described below, corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, and symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means X>
The invention related to means X1 is:
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment) including a gaming control means (gaming control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the gaming,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
When the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000) and the advantageous gaming state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) advantageous to the player ends (see FIG. 76), the game ends. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (stopping the game control process and the firing control process).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state ends, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of an advantageous gaming state, and there is no particular disadvantage to the player. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention related to means X2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
When the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) shifts to the normal gaming state, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. It is a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at a time when it is easy for the player to stop the game.

The invention related to means X3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
If it is determined to be a hit by the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
When the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state occurs, the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) is completed in the normal gaming state. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game so that it cannot be played (see FIG. 76).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, the winning determination process may be suspended for a predetermined number of times. In this case, the game is considered to be a substantially advantageous gaming state until a predetermined number of pending hit determination processes are completed in the normal gaming state, and when the substantially advantageous gaming state ends, the game is stopped. Is possible.

The invention related to means X4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
Equipped with a ball entry port (second starting port 12),
The game control means is capable of controlling the game ball to enter the ball entry easy state (high base state) in which the game ball enters the ball entry hole more easily than the normal game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is the easy ball entry state.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the ball entry easy state in which the game ball enters the entry hole more easily than in the normal game state ends, the game becomes unplayable. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game before the situation where the number of balls in possession decreases after the easy-to-enter state ends.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means X1 to X4 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , is different in that when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player ends, the game is controlled to be impossible to execute. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means Y>
The invention related to means Y1 is:
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment) including a gaming control means (gaming control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the gaming,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (the game control process and the firing control process are stopped) (see FIG. 76);
Based on the establishment of a reset condition that is not triggered by power-on (a first reset condition in which the special reset switch 181 is pressed, a second reset condition in which the customer waiting state continues for one hour), the specified number of measurements is determined. This is a gaming machine characterized by erasing (see FIGS. 77(A) and 77(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if a certain player stops playing before the specific measured number reaches the reference number, and a player who plays the game later starts playing, the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, It becomes a terrible situation. Therefore, the specific measurement number is erased based on the satisfaction of the reset condition that is not triggered by power-on. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player who played a game later from stopping the game immediately after starting the game, and it is possible to prevent a serious situation from occurring.

The invention related to means Y2 is:
Equipped with a special operable operation means (special reset switch 181),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the special operation means is operated (see FIG. 77(A)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, for example, after a certain player finishes playing the game, an employee of the gaming parlor operates the special operation means, thereby erasing the specific measurement number. With this, it is possible for a player who plays a game later to avoid stopping the game immediately after starting the game.

The invention related to means Y3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Y1,
The game control means can control the game to a customer waiting state after stopping and displaying an identification symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the winning determination process;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 77(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, the specific number of measurements is erased, assuming that the player has changed. With this, it is possible for a player who plays a game later to avoid stopping the game immediately after starting the game.

The invention related to means Y4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is a transition from an advantageous gaming state (high probability/high base state) advantageous to the player to a normal gaming state (see FIG. 77(A)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the player shifts from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, the specific measurement number is erased. In this way, once the situation where the advantageous gaming state continues ends, it is possible to prevent the specific measured number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

The invention related to means Y5 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the normal gaming state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 77(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if the normal gaming state continues for a specific period of time, it means that a situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by erasing the specific measured number, it is possible to prevent the specific measured number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means Y1 to Y5 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game may be controlled to be unplayable based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the specific measurement is performed based on the establishment of a reset condition that is not triggered by power-on. They differ in that they erase numbers. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means Z>
The invention related to means Z1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
In a gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment) including an operable specific operating means (RAM clear switch 119),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and firing control processing are stopped);
A game characterized by erasing game information related to the game (RAM clearing is executed) based on the operation of the specific operation means when the power is turned on, but not erasing the specific measured number. It is a machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award an excessive number of prize balls. Here, when an employee of the game parlor operates the specific operation means when the power is turned on, the game information related to the game is erased, but the specific number of measurements that have been measured is not erased. Therefore, even in a situation where the gaming state related to the game must be erased due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible to prevent the specific measurement number from being erased.

The invention related to means Z2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Z1,
Equipped with a special operable operation means (special reset switch 181),
The game control means is
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific measured number can be erased based on the operation of the special operation means (see FIG. 77(A)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the specific measurement number is erased by the gaming parlor employee operating the special operation means. Thereby, even if the gaming state related to the game is not erased, the employee of the gaming parlor can erase the specific measured number at any timing.

The invention related to means Z3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means Z1 or means Z2,
The game control means is
This gaming machine is characterized in that when it is determined that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9 a.m.), the specific measurement number can be deleted.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the predetermined reference time comes, the specific measurement number is erased. Therefore, it is possible to automatically erase the specific number of measurements without requiring an employee of the game parlor to perform any operation.

The invention related to means Z4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Z1 to means Z4,
The game control means is
The specific measurement numbers are stored in order by dividing them into predetermined periods from the first to the N(4)th period (period from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off),
In conjunction with erasing the specific number of measurements for the Nth predetermined period, the specific number of measurements for the first to (N-1)th predetermined periods is changed to the specific number of measurements for the second to Nth predetermined periods. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specified measurement number is shifted as shown in FIG.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to store specific measured numbers for each predetermined period from the first to the Nth. Then, as the specific measurement number for the Nth predetermined period is deleted, the specific measurement number for the first to (N-1)th predetermined period is changed to the specific measurement number for the second to Nth predetermined period. Shifted as a measurement number. Then, measurement of the specific measurement number for the first predetermined period is started. In this way, it is possible to automatically update the specific measurement number for each predetermined period from the first to the Nth without requiring an employee of the game parlor to operate it.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means Z1 to Z4 provides a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, in which the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game may be controlled to be unplayable based on the specific measured number exceeding a predetermined reference number, and game information related to the game may be controlled based on the specific operation means being operated when the power is turned on. The difference is that while it erases the specific number of measurements taken, it does not erase the specific number of measurements taken. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

13. Third Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 95 to 103. In the description of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the same components as the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is equipped with a function (referred to as an advantageous setting function) that allows the game parlor (hall) to intentionally set a gaming state advantageous to the player. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above is also applied to the third embodiment.

The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery (lottery related to the second starting opening 12), a small winning game that opens the second big prize opening 15 is executed, and a small winning When a game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big prize opening 15 during the game (so-called V passing), a jackpot game including a plurality of round games that open the first big prize opening 14 is executed. .

<Types of stop symbols>
First, types of stop symbols in the third embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment determines the special symbol random number obtained based on winning in the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 according to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 95(A). It is determined whether it is a big hit or not, and whether it is a small hit or not. As shown in FIG. 95(A), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) based on winnings in the first starting hole 11, a jackpot (so-called type 1 jackpot) is won with a predetermined probability, but a small There is no chance of winning. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) based on the prize entered into the second starting hole 12, a small win is always won. That is, in the special drawing 2 lottery, there is no chance of winning a jackpot (so-called type 1 jackpot), and there is no chance of losing.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when it is determined that a jackpot has been won, the jackpot symbol type is determined by determining the symbol type random number (jackpot symbol type random number) according to the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 95(B). Determine. In the lottery for special pattern 1, "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern S" is determined at a rate of 50%, and "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern T" is determined at a rate of 50%. Note that the results of the special drawing 2 lottery do not include jackpots (Type 1 jackpots). When the type of the winning jackpot symbol is different, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening in the type 1 jackpot game and the settings regarding the game state after the jackpot game are different (see FIG. 96). This point will be discussed later.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when it is determined that a small hit has been won, the type of the small winning symbol is determined by determining the symbol type random number according to the small winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 95(C). do. Specifically, in the special drawing 2 lottery, the "special drawing 2_small winning symbol s" is determined 80% of the time, and the "special drawing 2_small winning symbol t" is determined 20% of the time. If the type of the small winning symbol that has been won is different, the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small winning game or the type 2 jackpot game and the settings regarding the gaming state after the jackpot game are different (see FIG. 96). This point will be discussed later.

Further, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when it is determined that neither the jackpot nor the small win has been won (that is, when it is determined that it is a loss), the symbol type random number is changed to the loss symbol type shown in FIG. 95(D). The type of losing symbol is determined by making a determination according to the determination table. In the lottery for special pattern 1, 80% of the time the winning pattern will be “Special pattern 1_Loss pattern S”, 10% of the time it will be “Special pattern 1_ Losing pattern T”, and 10% of the time it will be “Special pattern 1_ Losing pattern S”. Special figure 1_Loss pattern U” is decided. Note that the results of the special drawing 2 lottery do not include losses. The difference in the type of losing symbols affects the settings regarding the gaming state after the losing symbols are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 97). This point will be discussed later.

Furthermore, when it is determined that the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment loses, it determines the reach random number according to the reach determination table shown in FIG. It is possible to decide whether or not to do so. The probability that it is determined that there is a reach differs depending on whether the gaming state is the normal time saving state described below. When the time is not in the normal time saving state, the probability of determining that there is a reach is higher than when the normal time saving state is in the normal time saving state.

Next, types of jackpots, types of small wins, and types of losses will be explained in detail based on FIGS. 96 and 97. As mentioned above, the results of the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery 1 and special symbol lottery 2) include "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". At the time of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 81. The jackpot symbols include "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern T." In addition, in the case of a "small win", the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 81. The small winning symbols include "special pattern 2_small winning pattern s" and "special pattern 2_small winning pattern t". At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 81. The losing symbols include "Special figure 1_Loss pattern S", "Special figure 1_Loss pattern T", and "Special figure 1_Loss pattern U".

When a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the first jackpot 14 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed in which the second large winning hole 15 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed. When a game ball enters the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during execution of a small winning game, the first big winning hole 14 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of small winning symbol that has been won. A "jackpot game" to open the game is executed. A jackpot game executed based on the result of special symbol lottery winning a jackpot is called a type 1 jackpot game, and a jackpot game executed based on passage to a specific area 16 is called a type 2 jackpot game.

In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending after the final round game ends. (also written as ED). Each round game starts with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the opening round game before the closing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small winning game includes a small winning opening game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened, an opening (pre-opening interval) before the small winning opening game starts, and a small winning opening game when the small winning opening game ends. It includes a later ending (post-closure interval).

As a result of the special symbol lottery, when a jackpot is won (that is, when a first-class jackpot is won), a jackpot game (first-class jackpot game) for opening the first jackpot 14 is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, there are two types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display 81a) that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). Specifically, in the lottery for special pattern 1, there is a possibility of winning "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern T".

As shown in FIG. 96, “Special drawing 1_Jackpot symbol S” and “Special drawing 1_Jackpot symbol T” are 4R (round) jackpots, and the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 per 1R is one. Yes, and its maximum opening time is 29.5 seconds. The gaming state after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

Here, the gaming state of this embodiment will be briefly explained. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment can be controlled to have a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state in which settings regarding the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12 are different from the non-time-saving state as the gaming state. The time saving state includes a normal time saving state where the game ball enters the second starting port 12 easily, and a slight time saving state (non-time saving state) where the setting makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 12 than the normal time saving state. (normal time saving state). The ease with which the ball enters the second starting port 12 in the slight time saving state is not much different from that in the non-time saving state. That is, in this embodiment, the normal time saving state is a high base state in which many balls can be expected to enter the second starting port 12, and the slight time saving state and the non-time saving state are such that it is not expected that many balls will enter the second starting port 12. It is in a low base state. Note that details of the gaming state will be described later.

If you win the "jackpot symbol S", the gaming state after the jackpot game will be a non-time saving state if the gaming state at the time of winning is a non-time saving state or a normal time saving state, but the gaming state at the time of winning is a slight time saving state. If it is, it is a slightly time-saving state. The number of time saving times in the slight time saving state is set to 800 times. The number of time saving times is the upper limit number of executions of special symbol fluctuations in the time saving state. When the number of executions of the special figure variation in the slight time saving state reaches 800, the slight time saving state ends. In this case, the non-time saving state is set.

On the other hand, if you win the "jackpot symbol T", the time-saving state after the jackpot game is non-time-saving regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving state, a slight time-saving state, or a normal time-saving state. state.

Further, if a small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the second large winning hole 15 is opened once. When a game ball enters the second big prize opening 15 opened by the small winning game and the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning device 15D, it becomes a jackpot win, and the first prize is won continuously. A jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) that opens the jackpot 14 is executed. When this jackpot game (a jackpot game triggered by passage to the specific area 16) is executed, the opening of the second big winning opening 15 as a small winning game corresponds to the 1R. In addition, if the game ball does not pass to the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the jackpot game will not be executed. A jackpot game or a small win game is sometimes called a special game. In addition, in the special game, there may be a round in which the grand prize opening is opened multiple times in one round.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, there are two types of small winning symbols that can be won in the special drawing 2 lottery (small winning symbols that are stopped and displayed on the special drawing 2 display 81b). Specifically, in the special drawing 2 lottery, there is a possibility of winning "special drawing 2_small winning symbol s" and "special drawing 2_small winning symbol t".

The "small winning symbol s" and the "small winning symbol t" are small winnings that always allow passage to the specific area 16 (also referred to as V passage) as long as the game is played correctly. In other words, in this embodiment, a small win based on the lottery of special drawing 2 has substantially the same meaning as a jackpot win.

In the small winning game based on each type of small winning symbols, the second large prize opening 15 is opened once for 1.8 seconds. As long as you play the game correctly, it is possible to win multiple prizes while the second big prize opening 15 is open, and the distribution member 16k is arranged so that at least one of the winning balls passes through the specific area 16. It is controlled to a passing permission state (the state shown in FIG. 3(B)).

In a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) that is executed based on the passage of a game ball to the specific area 16, even if it is a type 2 jackpot game based on "small winning symbol s", a type 2 jackpot game based on "small winning symbol t" In the game as well, the first grand prize opening 14 is opened once per 1R from the 2nd R to the 10th R with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds.

If the game state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving state or a slight time-saving state after the end of a type 2 jackpot game based on the "small winning symbol s", it is a non-time-saving state, and if it is a normal time-saving state, it is a normal time-saving state. state. The number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state is set to 100 times.

On the other hand, the gaming state after the end of the type 2 jackpot game based on the "small winning symbol t", regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a non-time saving state, a slight time saving state, or a normal time saving state, This is a non-time saving state. Note that in this embodiment, the special drawing 2 is drawn mainly in the normal time saving state, and the special drawing 2 is almost never drawn in the non-time saving state or the slight time saving state.

Furthermore, when it is determined that the winning symbol is a loss as a result of the special symbol lottery, the type of the losing symbol is determined. As shown in FIG. 97, there are three types of losing symbols (losing symbols that are stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display 81a) determined by the special drawing 1 lottery. Specifically, in the lottery for special pattern 1, one of "special pattern 1_loss pattern S", "special pattern 1_loss pattern T", and "special pattern 1_loss pattern U" is determined. It should be noted that the special drawing 2 lottery will not be determined as a loss.

"Special figure 1_Loss pattern S" is a normal loss that does not affect the transition of the gaming state, but "Special figure 1_Loss pattern T" and "Special figure 1_Loss pattern U" are the trigger for controlling the time-saving state. This is a special loss (an example of a specific result). That is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a special loss (also referred to as a time-saving loss), the game control microcomputer 101 controls the gaming state after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed to be a time-saving state. However, if the time saving state (normal time saving state or slight time saving state) is already in place at the control timing to the time saving state based on a special loss (that is, when the time saving flag is ON), the setting of the gaming state is not changed. In other words, special losses are treated in the same way as normal losses.

More specifically, the gaming state after the stop display of the "losing symbol T" in the non-time saving state is a normal time saving state, and the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. Further, the gaming state after the stop display of the "losing symbol U" in the non-time saving state is a slight time saving state, and the number of time saving times is set to 800 times.

<Game status>
Here, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 98(A), the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state) is the same as the winning probability of the normal symbol in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol lottery is set to 65535/65536 in any of the game states: non-time saving state, normal time saving state, and slight time saving state. In other words, in any gaming state, it is determined that the normal symbol lottery is almost a hit. Note that in the time saving state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery may be higher than in the non-time saving state.

Further, in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state), as shown in FIG. 98(B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 60 seconds in the non-time saving state, 1 second in the normal time saving state, and 30 seconds in the slight time saving state. Note that the stop time of the normal symbols is 0.5 seconds in any game state.

Further, in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state), as shown in FIG. 98(C), the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this embodiment, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is 0.05 seconds per time in the non-time saving state, 2.5 seconds in the normal time saving state, and 0.1 seconds in the slight time saving state. It is.

Further, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game may be greater than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened is once in the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state, but twice in the normal time saving state.

Here, in the non-time saving state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost always be a win, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is as long as 60 seconds, and the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is opened for 0.05 seconds once. It is an extremely short period of time. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, even if you play the game by hitting right (a hitting method that allows the game ball to pass through the gate 13), it is almost impossible to expect to win the electric chew 12D.

On the other hand, in the normal time saving state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost always be a win, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is as short as 1 second, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 2.5 seconds. Twice is long enough. Therefore, in the normal time saving state, by playing the game with the right hand, winnings to the electric chew 12D may occur frequently. That is, it can be said that the normal time saving state is a gaming state where it is easier to win the electric chew 12D compared to the non-time saving state.

On the other hand, in the slight time saving state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost always be a win, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is as long as 30 seconds, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 0.1 seconds. It's as short as once. Therefore, in the slight time saving state, various parameters related to the ease of winning the electric chew 12D (the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation time and stop time of the normal symbol, the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D) are in the non-time saving state. Comparatively, although the setting is such that it is easy to win a prize in the Denchu 12D, it is almost impossible to expect to win a prize in the Denchu 12D even if you play the game with a right-handed player.

In this way, in the non-time-saving state and the slight time-saving state, the player cannot expect to win the electric chew 12D even if he plays right-handed, so the player advances the game by playing left-handed. On the other hand, in the normal time-saving state, the player plays the game by hitting the right hand because winnings to the electric chew 12D occur frequently by playing the game right. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, even during the jackpot game, the player plays the game with the right hand.

Similar to the normal time saving state, the slight time saving state can be said to be a gaming state in which it is easier to win the Denchu 12D compared to the non-time saving state, but it is more difficult to win the Denchu 12D than the normal time saving state. This is the gaming state of the settings. Further, the slight time saving state is a gaming state that is closer in nature to a non-time saving state than the normal time saving state, since winning the electric chew 12D is not expected. Note that the normal time saving state is an example of a specific gaming state, and the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state are examples of non-specific gaming states.

Incidentally, in the normal time-saving state, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, the normal time saving state is also called a "high base state", and the non-time saving state is also called a "low base state". The slight time saving state is also an example of a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning to the second starting port 12 by the electric chew 12D) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also called the electric support control state. The low base state is also referred to as a non-electrical support control state.

Note that the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation time and stop time of the normal symbols, the opening time and number of openings of the electric chew 12D, etc. can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the gameplay.

<Special figure fluctuation pattern>
Next, the determination of the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern according to different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables for the non-time-saving state, the slight time-saving state, and the normal time-saving state (see FIG. 99).

First, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state will be explained based on FIG. 99(A). In the non-time saving state, the game is played by left-handed hitting, and the special drawing 1 is drawn. The lottery results for special map 1 include jackpots and losses. In the case of a jackpot, either the special symbol variation pattern P80 that performs SP reach, or the special symbol variation pattern P81 that does not develop into SP reach and performs normal reach is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, if it is a loss symbol S, which is a loss normally, or a loss symbol U, which is a control trigger for a slight time shortening state, when it is determined that there is a reach, a special symbol fluctuation pattern that performs an SP reach If you select either P82 or special pattern variation pattern P83 in which a normal reach occurs without developing into an SP reach, and it is determined that there is no reach, a special pattern variation in which a reach is not formed according to the number of reserved balls. Select pattern P84 or P85. In addition, when the losing symbol U is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving state, the state shifts to the slight time saving state, but in this embodiment, since the slight time saving state is the least advantageous gaming state for the player, the losing symbol U is not displayed in the non-time saving state. When drawn, the same special symbol variation pattern as when the losing symbol S is drawn is selected.

On the other hand, in the case of a loss, if the stopped symbol is a loss symbol T which triggers the control of the normal time saving state, a special symbol variation pattern P86 for performing a RUSH entry effect is selected. When the losing symbol T is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving state, the state shifts to the normal time saving state. The RUSH entry performance is a performance that suggests a transition to a normal time saving state. The RUSH entry performance will be described later.

Next, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in the short time saving state will be explained based on FIG. 99(B). In this embodiment, the slight time saving state is the least advantageous gaming state for the player. That is, in this embodiment, the slight time saving state functions as a normal gaming state (normal gaming state). In the slight time saving state, the game is played by left-handed hitting, and the special drawing 1 lottery is performed. When the lottery result of special figure 1 is a jackpot, either the special figure variation pattern P90 that performs SP reach, or the special figure variation pattern P91 that does not develop into SP reach and performs normal reach is selected. On the other hand, if the lottery result of special figure 1 is a loss, regardless of which losing symbol it is, if it is determined that there is a reach, the special pattern variation pattern P92 that performs the SP reach or the SP reach Select any of the special pattern fluctuation patterns P93 that performs a normal reach without development, and when it is determined that there is no reach, select the special pattern fluctuation pattern P94 or P95 in which no reach is formed, depending on the number of reserved balls. . Even if you draw a special loss (losing symbol T, losing symbol U) in the slight time saving state, the game state is not newly set, so if you draw a special losing in the slight time saving state, you will draw a normal loss (losing symbol S). I try to select the same special pattern fluctuation pattern as in the previous case.

Next, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in the normal time saving state will be explained based on FIG. 99(C). The normal time saving state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player in this embodiment. The number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state is set to 100 times, and it is configured so that a small win is always won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and a V passage always occurs when a small win game is executed. Therefore, being controlled to the normal time saving state means acquiring the next jackpot game (so-called confirmation of consecutive games).

In the normal time saving state, the game is played by right-handed hitting, and the special drawing 2 is drawn. As shown in FIG. 99(C), when the special drawing 2 is drawn in the normal time saving state, the special drawing variation pattern P100 with a variation time of 13 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special drawing 2. When this special figure variation pattern is selected, an instant hit effect is executed. In the instant winning performance, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (Zero) indicating winning as soon as a reach is formed within a variable time of 13 seconds.

<Processing of microcomputer for game control>
Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 in the third embodiment will be explained. In the third embodiment, the game state management process shown in FIG. 100 is performed instead of the game state management process (see FIG. 89) described in the second embodiment. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment does not set the high probability state, so it does not perform processing related to the probability change flag indicating the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the game state management process (S1902) in the third embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is ON (S2101), and if it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2110. , if it is ON, the value of the time-saving counter that counts the number of special symbol variations (special symbol variation display) executed during the time-saving state is decremented by 1 (S2102), and if the value of the time-saving counter is "0". It is determined whether there is one (S2103). If it is not "0", the process advances to step S2110, and if it is "0", the time saving flag is turned off (S2104), and a gaming state flag updating process (S2105) is performed, and the process advances to step S2110.

In the gaming state flag update process (S2105), the value of the gaming state flag is set to a value corresponding to the current gaming state. As shown in the table in FIG. 100, the value of the gaming state flag is set to "0" if it is in a non-time saving state, "1" if it is in a normal time saving state, and "1" if it is in a slight time saving state. 2”. In this gaming state flag updating process (S2105), since the time saving flag has just been turned off, the value of the gaming state flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the non-time saving state.

In step S2110, it is determined whether the time saving flag is OFF. If the time saving flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S2130, but if the time saving flag is OFF, it is then determined whether the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a special loss (S2111). Then, if it is not a special loss (loss pattern T or loss pattern U), the process advances to step S2130, but if it is a special loss, the time saving flag is turned on (S2112), and the number of time reductions according to the type of the losing pattern (Fig. 97 ) is set in the time saving counter (S2113), a gaming state flag update process (S2114) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2130.

In this gaming state flag update process (S2114), if the time saving flag has been turned ON based on the losing symbol T, the value of the gaming state flag is set to the value "1" corresponding to the normal time saving state, and the losing symbol U If the time saving flag has been turned ON based on , the value of the gaming state flag is set to the value "2" corresponding to the slight time saving state. By setting the value of the gaming state flag to "1", the gaming state is controlled to a normal time saving state, and by setting the value of the gaming state flag to "2", the gaming state is controlled to a slight time saving state. . In addition, each time-saving state in this embodiment ends when either the end condition is satisfied, that is, the special symbol change is performed for a predetermined upper limit number of executions (time-saving number), or the next jackpot game is executed. .

Note that in this embodiment, the time-saving state is controlled based on a special loss only when the time-saving state is not (YES in step S2110). That is, even if a special loss is drawn in the slight time saving state, a new time saving state is not set. Here, in this embodiment, in the game state management process (S1902), a process regarding whether to end the time saving state is first performed (steps S2101 to S2105), and then a process regarding whether to control to the time saving state based on a special loss. (Steps S2110 to S2114) are performed. Therefore, for example, when the special loss is displayed in a stopped state due to the change in special figure 1 that is the final change in the slight time saving state, the small time saving state is transferred to the non-time saving state in the processing of steps S2101 to S2105, and the state is transferred to the non-time saving state in steps S2110 to S2114. The process will transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state. Note that by performing the processing in steps S2110 to S2114 before the processing in steps S2101 to S2105, a configuration may be adopted in which even if a special loss occurs due to the final change in the time saving state, the control is not changed to a new time saving state. .

In step S2130, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming state designation command including information on the gaming state flag (namely, information on the current gaming state) to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. By outputting this command, information on the current gaming state is notified to the sub-control board 120.

<Game flow in the third embodiment>
Next, the flow of the game progress in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 101. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the gaming state that is least advantageous for the player among the non-time saving state, slight time saving state, and normal time saving state cannot be changed to the normal time saving state even if the losing symbol U is drawn. The time is short. The non-time saving state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the slight time saving state in that it can be transferred to the normal time saving state by drawing the losing symbol U. In addition, the normal time-saving state is a gaming state in which winning the jackpot game based on the lottery of special drawing 2 is virtually certain, so among the non-time-saving state, the slight time-saving state, and the normal time-saving state, it is the most convenient for the player. This is an advantageous gaming situation.

In this embodiment, the slight time saving state functions as a normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 101, when the time is shortened, the production mode is set to the normal production mode (described in detail later). In the slight time saving state, the game is progressed by hitting left, and the special drawing 1 lottery is performed. The pachinko game machine of this embodiment is configured so that it does not directly shift from the slight time saving state to the normal time saving state. Therefore, when the player is in a slight time-saving state, he or she first proceeds with the game with the aim of transitioning to a non-time-saving state. If the "jackpot symbol S" is won in the slight time saving state, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the slight time saving state again. On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol T" is won, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a non-time saving state. Also, when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 800 times (the number of time saving times in the slight time saving state) without winning a jackpot in the small time saving state, the non-time saving state is also set.

The non-time saving state is a gaming state that can be shifted to the normal time saving state by drawing a special loss, and is one of the gaming states advantageous to the player. If it is in a non-time saving state, the production mode is set to the chance production mode (described in detail later). In the non-time-saving state, the game is progressed by hitting left, and the special drawing 1 is drawn. In this form, the probability of winning a special lottery in the special drawing 1 is 1/5. At this time, there is a probability of 1/2 in which the losing symbol T (the symbol that triggers the normal time-saving state) is assigned, and a probability of 1/2 is that the symbol is distributed into the losing symbol U (the symbol that triggers the slight time-saving state). When the special loss won in the non-time saving state is the losing symbol U, the game is played with the aim of shifting to the non-time saving state again in order to shift to the slight time saving state.

On the other hand, when the special loss won in the non-time saving state is the losing symbol T, the state shifts to the normal time saving state. The normal time saving state is a gaming state in which the acquisition of the jackpot game based on the special drawing 2 lottery is substantially determined. In the case of the normal time saving state, the production mode is set to the RUSH production mode (described in detail later). In the normal time saving state, the game is progressed by hitting the right hand, and the special drawing 2 is drawn. In the special drawing 2 lottery, you will definitely win the small prize. At this time, the probability is 4/5 that the small winning symbol s (the symbol that triggers the normal time-saving state) will be distributed, and the probability of 1/5 will be that the small winning symbol t (the symbol that will trigger the non-time-saving state) will be distributed. It will be done. If the small win won in the normal time saving state is the small winning symbol s, the normal time saving state is set again after the type 2 jackpot game based on the passage of V, so that the so-called consecutive jackpots are confirmed.

On the other hand, if the small win won in the normal time saving state is the small winning symbol t, the non-time saving state is set after the type 2 jackpot game based on V passing. In this non-time-saving state, if the losing symbol T can be drawn, the normal time-saving state can be restored. On the other hand, if the losing symbol U is drawn, the state shifts to a slight time saving state. In this manner, in this embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, the time saving state does not directly shift to the slight time saving state, but is temporarily set to the non-time saving state. Therefore, there is an expectation that the normal time saving state will be set again, and the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, if you win a jackpot based on the drawing of special drawing 1 in a non-time saving state, whether you draw the jackpot symbol S or the jackpot symbol T, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be non-time saving. The state is now set. This prevents the player from being disappointed when the player is set to a slight time-saving state that is more disadvantageous than the usual non-time-saving state even though he has won a big hit.

Here, the gaming state when the power is turned on will be explained. If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 119, the gaming state at the time the power is turned on inherits the gaming state at the time the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a slightly time-saving state after the store closes the previous day, the gaming state when the power is turned on when the store opens remains in the slightly time-shortened state. On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the operation of the RAM clear switch 119, the flags and the like start up with their initial settings. That is, as shown in FIG. 101, when the RAM is cleared in response to power-on, the gaming state becomes a non-time saving state. As described above, the non-time-saving state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the slight time-saving state in that a transition to the normal time-saving state based on the losing symbol T can be expected. Therefore, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is a gaming machine that can be set to a state advantageous to the player by the operation of an employee of the gaming parlor (hall) or the like. In other words, the pachinko game machine of this embodiment can be said to be equipped with an advantageous setting function. As a result, in this embodiment, a player aiming at a pachinko machine of this embodiment in a state where no one has played since the RAM has been cleared by an employee of the gaming parlor, etc., You can look forward to playing games on gaming machines. That is, it can be expected that the operation of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment will be improved immediately after the opening of the game hall (so-called first thing in the morning).

<Example of production in the third embodiment>
Next, an example of the performance in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 102 and 103. First, the production mode will be explained.

The presentation modes of this embodiment include a "normal presentation mode" in which a daytime background image is displayed on the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 102(C), the background image of space is displayed on the display section 50a. Includes the ``RUSH production mode'' that is displayed on the screen.

The normal performance mode (FIG. 102(A)) is a performance mode that is set when the time is shortened. As described above, the non-time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state advantageous to the player, so this slight time saving state substantially functions as a normal gaming state. Setting the normal performance mode (in other words, displaying a daytime background image) functions as a suggestion that the time is shortened.

The chance performance mode (FIG. 102(B)) is a performance mode that is set in a non-time saving state. The non-time saving state in this embodiment allows a transition to the normal time saving state based on the losing symbol T, so it is a chance for the player to make the transition to the normal time saving state. The setting of the chance production mode (in other words, the display of the band image OG including the character ``chance'') functions as a suggestion that the user is in a non-time-saving state. Moreover, since the non-time saving state is set when the RAM is cleared, the setting of the chance production mode also functions as a suggestion that the RAM is cleared.

The RUSH performance mode (FIG. 102(C)) is a performance mode that is set when the time is normally shortened. When controlled to the normal time saving state, the execution of the Type 2 jackpot game based on the lottery of special drawing 2 is confirmed, so the setting of the RUSH effect mode (in other words, the display of the background image of the universe) is in the normal time saving state. It functions as a suggestion of what to do, and also functions as a suggestion of confirmation of execution of a jackpot game. In addition, in the normal time saving state, the game progresses with the aim of winning the second starting port 12 by right-handed hitting, so when controlled to the RUSH production mode, the performance control microcomputer 121 will not allow the game to proceed with right-handed hitting. A right-hand hitting image G108 informing that this should be done is displayed at the upper right corner of the display section 50a.

Next, the preview performance in the case of the normal performance mode will be explained. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 121 is capable of executing a dialogue preview performance in which a predetermined character is displayed together with dialogue when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. The types of lines in dialogue previews include lines that suggest a high level of expectation for a jackpot (e.g., "chance"), lines that suggest a higher level of expectation for a jackpot (e.g., "fierce heat"), etc. , there is a line (specific line) that suggests that the pachinko game machine of this embodiment is equipped with an advantageous setting function. The pachinko game machine of this embodiment can execute the performance shown in FIG. 102(D) as a dialogue preview performance of a specific dialogue. The effect shown in FIG. 102(D) is a speech preview effect in which a mini-character with an apple motif says the line ``It may be easy to rush into RUSH first thing in the morning.'' This allows the player to play the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is possible to understand that the advantageous setting function is installed, in other words, the first thing in the morning is set to a non-time-saving state by clearing the RAM, and there is a possibility that it is easy to shift to the normal time-saving state. It should be noted that such a dialogue preview performance of a specific dialogue functions as an explanatory performance that explains to the player that an advantageous setting function is installed. The explanation that the advantageous setting function is installed does not necessarily need to be made as a speech preview performance, and may be provided as an ending performance accompanying the ending of the jackpot game, or as a customer waiting performance. .

Next, a description will be given of the RUSH entry effect performed when transitioning from the non-time saving state to the normal time saving state. If the losing symbol T is won based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 in the non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special symbol fluctuation pattern P86 (see FIG. 99(A)). And when the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is P86, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a fluctuation performance accompanied by a RUSH entry performance. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the reach state as a RUSH entry production (FIGS. 103 (A) and (B)), and then sets the middle production symbol EZ2 as the special symbol TZ. Stop display with special eyes. In this embodiment, the special symbol TZ is an image including the characters (RUSH) of the name of the production mode (namely RUSH production mode) corresponding to the destination gaming state (normal time saving state). In this case, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are stopped and displayed at specific positions of "1, 3, and 5." In this way, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed with special eyes, thereby suggesting a shift to the normal time saving state (RUSH performance mode). In other words, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 with special eyes is a performance that suggests to the player that the player is transitioning to a normal time saving state (drawing a losing symbol T) or a transition to RUSH performance mode. It functions as a production that suggests that something will happen. Note that the special eyes of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and the specific eyes of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

<Effects of the third embodiment>
As explained in detail above, according to the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, an employee of the game parlor or the like can clear the RAM (turn on the power switch 191 while pressing the RAM clear switch 119). It is possible to set the time saving state, and the non-time saving state is advantageous to the player in that it is possible to shift to the normal time saving state by drawing a losing symbol T. That is, according to this embodiment, employees of the gaming parlor and the like can set the gaming state to be advantageous to the players, and it is expected that the service to the players will be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the RAM clear operation for setting the non-time saving state is an operation that can only be performed when the power is turned on. In other words, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on to open a gaming parlor, it is possible to set the gaming state of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment to a non-time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to induce players who are looking to play in a non-time saving state to a gaming machine that has not been played by anyone since the gaming parlor opened.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when the non-time-saving state is set, the chance effect mode is set (FIG. 102(B)), so that an employee of the game parlor or the like cannot clear the RAM. It is possible for the player to judge whether or not the game machine is a game machine with a high level of accuracy, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, it is possible to suggest by the dialogue preview production that there is a possibility that the game state will be set to be advantageous to the player by the operation of an employee of the game parlor or the like. (See FIG. 102(D)). Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the gaming machine is equipped with an advantageous setting function.

<Example of modification of the third embodiment>
Hereinafter, a modification example of the third embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of the modification of the third embodiment, the same components as the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples of the third embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the third embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. In addition, the configuration included in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment described above and/or the configuration included in the second embodiment described above may be used in the third embodiment and its modifications to the extent that it does not interfere with the game. It can be adopted in gaming machines as understood from examples.

In the third embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is not set to the normal time saving state if a jackpot is won in the slight time saving state, but the winning in the slight time saving state is controlled to the normal time saving state. A jackpot symbol may be provided as an opportunity.

In addition, in the third embodiment, there is one type of loss pattern (loss pattern U) that triggers the transition to the slight time reduction state, and the number of time reductions in the slight time reduction state is 800; A plurality of types of losing symbols may be provided, and the number of time saving times in the slight time saving state may be varied depending on the type of losing symbols. For example, when the time saving state is set based on a certain losing symbol, the number of time saving times is set to a small number such as 30 times, and when the time saving state is set to the slight time saving state based on another losing symbol, the number of time saving times is 900 times, etc. If the number of times is large, it is possible to provide some time-saving states that are easy to shift to a non-time-saving state and others that are difficult to shift to, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, the time saving state is not directly shifted to the slight time saving state, but is set to the non-time saving state. However, it is not possible to directly shift to the slight time saving state. Even if there is a configuration (a configuration in which the gaming state after a jackpot game based on a win in the normal time saving state is set to a slight time saving state, or a structure in which the gaming state is set to a slight time saving state at the end of the normal time saving state due to the expiration of the number of time saving times). good.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, by setting the chance production mode (displaying the band image OG including the word "chance"), it is suggested that there is no time saving state, but the suggestion that it is a non time saving state ( The suggestion that the gaming machine has had its RAM cleared may be made by other effects, such as displaying a character image that is not displayed in gaming states other than the non-time saving state. In this case, the performance that suggests a non-time-saving state (suggestive performance) does not have to be performed all the time when the time-saving state is non-time-saving, but is performed only if the performance execution lottery is won. It may also be something that is done. In addition, in the third embodiment, since the same daytime background image is displayed in both the non-time-saving state and the slight time-saving state, the effect suggesting the non-time-saving state is executed only when winning the execution lottery. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the state has been controlled from a non-time saving state to a slight time saving state based on the losing symbol U, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game. Since the state in which the display of the band image OG including the character ``chance'' is not displayed in the chance production mode is the same as the normal production mode, it can be said that both are set to the same production mode.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the power is turned on with RAM clearing, the state is controlled to the non-time saving state, and when the state is controlled to the non-time saving state in response to the end of the jackpot game state (the state where the jackpot game is being executed). In addition, even when the time saving state is controlled to a non-time saving state in response to the number of time saving times being used up in a slight time saving state, the same production mode (chance production mode) is set. The chance production mode is set only when the time saving state is controlled, and the non-time saving mode is set when the time saving state is controlled in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state, or in response to the number of time saving times being exhausted in the slight time saving state. When the state is controlled, it may be configured to be set to a production mode different from the chance production mode. Specifically, for example, if the state is controlled to a non-time saving state in response to the end of a jackpot gaming state, or if it is controlled to a non-time saving state in response to the number of time savings being exhausted in a slight time saving state, It may be configured to be set to the same production mode as the time saving state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the state after the RAM is cleared, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the RAM clear operation using the RAM clear switch 119 is a state setting operation for setting the non-time saving state, but the state setting operation is an operation that does not use the RAM clear switch 119 (RAM clear ). For example, a dedicated switch for setting the non-time-saving state may be provided, and the non-time-saving state may be set by pressing the dedicated switch. In this case, the period during which the dedicated switch can be effectively operated may be a period other than when the power is turned on. Specifically, for example, the non-time saving state may be set when a dedicated switch is pressed during a customer waiting state (a state in which a customer waiting performance is performed). Note that it is preferable that the dedicated switch be provided in a position where the player cannot arbitrarily operate it, such as by mounting it on the main control board 100. In other words, like the RAM clear switch 119, the dedicated switch is preferably provided at a position where it cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 2 is opened.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the machine is configured as a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixing machine that can execute a jackpot game based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 in the second big prize opening 15, but the machine is configured as a so-called "ST machine". It is also possible to use a type of game machine other than a one-type and two-type mixed machine, such as a "definite loop machine" or a "definitely variable loop machine." When using an ST machine or a variable loop machine, it may be a so-called "pattern variable machine" in which the transition to a high probability state with a high probability of winning a jackpot is determined based on the type of special symbol won, or a V attacker (specific area It may also be a so-called "V-probability changing machine" in which transition to a high probability state is determined based on passage to a specific area within a big winning device (having a big prize winning device). In addition, when configured as an "ST machine" or "definitely variable loop machine", it is configured so that the jackpot can be won in both the lottery for special map 1 and the lottery for special map 2, and the lottery for special map 2 is more likely than the lottery for special map 1. It is preferable that the lottery is advantageous in that it is easier to execute a jackpot game in which a large number of prize balls can be acquired, and that the game state after the end of the jackpot game is easily controlled to a high probability state. Furthermore, even if a special loss is drawn in a high probability state, the settings of the gaming state will not be changed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the number of times of time saving in various time saving states can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above embodiment, parameters in various time-saving states (normal symbol fluctuation time and stop time, electric chew opening pattern, etc.) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above embodiment, the types and distribution ratios of each jackpot symbol, each small prize symbol, and each loss symbol can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the machine is configured as a so-called 1-type and 2-type mixing machine, but depending on the desired gaming experience, it may also be a so-called "Hanemono" (2-type machine) without a 1-type jackpot. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which it is impossible to win a so-called "direct jackpot" in either the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 lottery.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the upper limit number of execution times (time saving number) of the variable display of special symbols in the time saving state is counted regardless of whether the variable display of special symbol 1 is executed or the variable display of special symbol 2 is executed. In addition to this total upper limit number of executions, there is also the upper limit number of executions of special figure 1, which counts only the variable display of special figure 1, and the upper limit number of executions of special figure 1, which counts only the variable display of special figure 2. FIG. 2 An upper limit number of times of execution may be set, and the time saving state may be terminated when any one of the number of times is satisfied. In addition, the special figure 1 upper limit number of times of execution and the special figure 2 upper limit number of times of execution can be set to a different value from the total upper limit number of times of execution. In addition, instead of setting a total upper limit number of executions, a special figure 1 upper limit number of executions and a special figure 2 upper limit number of executions are provided, and when either number of times is satisfied, the time saving state ends, or special figure 2 It may be configured such that only an upper limit number of executions is set and the time saving state ends when this number is satisfied.

<Invention shown in third embodiment>
In the above-mentioned third embodiment and its modification example, inventions of the following means are shown. In the explanation of the means described below, corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, and symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means S>
The invention related to means S1 is
A prize opening into which a game ball can enter (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12),
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that sets a game state based on the game ball entering the input prize hole;
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) for setting a performance mode for performing the performance,
The gaming states include a first state (normal time-saving state) in which the game ball easily enters the winning hole, and a second state (non-time-saving state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the winning hole than in the first state. condition) and,
The game control means may set the second state as an initial state,
When the second state is set as the initial state, the effect control means selects a specific mode (chance effect mode) including a predetermined suggestive effect (for example, display of the band image OG shown in FIG. 102(B)) as the effect mode. ) is a gaming machine characterized by setting.

The invention related to means S2 is:
A gaming machine according to means S1,
The gaming state includes a third state (slight time saving state) which is different from the second state and in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the prize slot than the first state,
The game control means is capable of making a special determination as to whether or not to set the first state (determination as to whether to shift to the normal time saving state based on the losing symbol T),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second state is more likely to be determined in the special determination when the first state is set than the third state.

The invention related to means S3 is
A gaming machine according to means S2,
The game control means changes the game state from the second state to the third state when a predetermined condition (stop display of the losing symbol U that triggers the transition to the slight time saving state) is satisfied in the second state. Sometimes,
The game machine is characterized in that the performance control means continues the specific mode even if the gaming state changes from the second state to the third state in the specific mode.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-47326, after a jackpot game, the gaming machine is sometimes controlled to a time-saving state in which the gaming ball easily enters the starting slot. However, there is room for improvement regarding the performance in gaming machines that can be controlled in a time-saving state. By incorporating improved effects, it is expected that the game will become more interesting. Therefore, the invention related to means S provides a game machine described in JP-A No. 2018-47326, in which "the game ball enters the winning hole more easily than the first state in which the game ball enters the winning hole more easily. The difference is that a difficult second state is sometimes set as the initial state, and when the second state is set as the initial state, a specific mode including a predetermined suggestive performance is set as the performance mode. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to increasing the interest of the game through performance.

11...First starting port 12...Second starting port 50...Image display device 50a...Display section 55...On board movable device 55k...On board movable body 100...Main control board 101...Game control microcomputer 120...Sub control board 121 ... Production control microcomputer HA ... Hold icon TA ... The relevant icon PY1 ... Pachinko game machine

Claims (3)

A game control means capable of determining whether or not to control to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
and a performance control means capable of executing a determination result performance that suggests the result of the determination,
The performance control means is
In the determination result performance, it is possible to shift to an expectation transition performance that suggests the degree of expectation to be controlled to the special gaming state,
In the judgment result performance, an expectation suggestion image that suggests a transition to the expectation transition performance can be displayed ,
In the determination result production, a special image can be displayed that suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled to the special gaming state is higher than the expectation suggestion image, without suggesting a transition to the expectation transition production;
The expected transition performance includes a low expectation transition performance and a high expectation transition performance that suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled to the special gaming state is higher than the low expectation transition performance,
The expectation-suggesting images include a low-expectation-suggesting image that suggests a transition to the low-expectation transition performance, and a high-expectation-suggesting image that suggests a transition to the high-expectation transition performance;
When the low expectation suggestion image is displayed at a predetermined branching point in the judgment result presentation, the transition is made to the low expectation transition presentation; on the other hand, when the high expectation suggestion image is displayed at the predetermined branching point, Moved to the highly anticipated transition production ,
The case where the special image is displayed instead of the low expectation suggestion image and the transition to the low expectation transition effect is performed is better than the case where the low expectation suggestion image is displayed and the transition to the low expectation transition effect is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the special gaming state is high . In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The performance control means is
In the determination result performance, before displaying the low expectation suggestion image, it is possible to execute a prior low expectation suggestion performance that suggests a transition to the low expectation transition performance,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, after executing the prior low expectation suggestion performance, the special image may be displayed in place of the low expectation suggestion image to shift to the low expectation transition performance. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The case where the special image is displayed instead of the high expectation suggestion image and the transition to the high expectation transition effect is performed is better than the case where the high expectation suggestion image is displayed and the transition to the high expectation transition effect is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the special gaming state is high.

Images